1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
3 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007
4 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 This file is part of GCC.
8 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
9 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
10 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
13 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
14 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
15 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
18 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
20 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
24 #include "coretypes.h"
32 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
35 #include "insn-config.h"
36 #include "insn-attr.h"
37 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
44 #include "typeclass.h"
47 #include "langhooks.h"
50 #include "tree-iterator.h"
51 #include "tree-pass.h"
52 #include "tree-flow.h"
57 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
58 from first to last or from last to first.
60 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
61 only if we have push insns. */
65 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
66 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
67 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first. */
73 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
74 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
75 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
77 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
82 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
83 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
84 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
85 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
86 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
87 the same indirect address eventually. */
90 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
101 int explicit_inc_from;
102 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
103 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
107 /* This structure is used by store_by_pieces to describe the clear to
110 struct store_by_pieces
116 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
117 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
118 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode);
123 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
126 static void move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode,
127 struct move_by_pieces *);
128 static bool block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void);
129 static bool emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned, unsigned, HOST_WIDE_INT);
130 static tree emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int);
131 static void emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx, rtx, rtx, unsigned);
132 static rtx clear_by_pieces_1 (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode);
133 static void clear_by_pieces (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned int);
134 static void store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *, unsigned int);
135 static void store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode,
136 struct store_by_pieces *);
137 static tree clear_storage_libcall_fn (int);
138 static rtx compress_float_constant (rtx, rtx);
139 static rtx get_subtarget (rtx);
140 static void store_constructor_field (rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
141 HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
142 tree, tree, int, int);
143 static void store_constructor (tree, rtx, int, HOST_WIDE_INT);
144 static rtx store_field (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode,
145 tree, tree, int, bool);
147 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree, const_tree);
149 static int is_aligning_offset (tree, tree);
150 static void expand_operands (tree, tree, rtx, rtx*, rtx*,
151 enum expand_modifier);
152 static rtx reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx, rtx, tree);
153 static rtx do_store_flag (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode, int);
155 static void emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode, rtx, tree);
157 static void do_tablejump (rtx, enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx, rtx);
158 static rtx const_vector_from_tree (tree);
159 static void write_complex_part (rtx, rtx, bool);
161 /* Record for each mode whether we can move a register directly to or
162 from an object of that mode in memory. If we can't, we won't try
163 to use that mode directly when accessing a field of that mode. */
165 static char direct_load[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
166 static char direct_store[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
168 /* Record for each mode whether we can float-extend from memory. */
170 static bool float_extend_from_mem[NUM_MACHINE_MODES][NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
172 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
173 to perform a structure copy. */
174 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
175 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
176 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
177 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO)
180 /* This macro is used to determine whether clear_by_pieces should be
181 called to clear storage. */
182 #ifndef CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P
183 #define CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
184 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
185 < (unsigned int) CLEAR_RATIO)
188 /* This macro is used to determine whether store_by_pieces should be
189 called to "memset" storage with byte values other than zero, or
190 to "memcpy" storage when the source is a constant string. */
191 #ifndef STORE_BY_PIECES_P
192 #define STORE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) \
193 (move_by_pieces_ninsns (SIZE, ALIGN, STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1) \
194 < (unsigned int) MOVE_RATIO)
197 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block moves. */
198 enum insn_code movmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
200 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block sets. */
201 enum insn_code setmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
203 /* These arrays record the insn_code of three different kinds of insns
204 to perform block compares. */
205 enum insn_code cmpstr_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
206 enum insn_code cmpstrn_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
207 enum insn_code cmpmem_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
209 /* Synchronization primitives. */
210 enum insn_code sync_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
211 enum insn_code sync_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
212 enum insn_code sync_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
213 enum insn_code sync_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
214 enum insn_code sync_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
215 enum insn_code sync_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
216 enum insn_code sync_old_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
217 enum insn_code sync_old_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
218 enum insn_code sync_old_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
219 enum insn_code sync_old_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
220 enum insn_code sync_old_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
221 enum insn_code sync_old_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
222 enum insn_code sync_new_add_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
223 enum insn_code sync_new_sub_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
224 enum insn_code sync_new_ior_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
225 enum insn_code sync_new_and_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
226 enum insn_code sync_new_xor_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
227 enum insn_code sync_new_nand_optab[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
228 enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
229 enum insn_code sync_compare_and_swap_cc[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
230 enum insn_code sync_lock_test_and_set[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
231 enum insn_code sync_lock_release[NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
233 /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is nonzero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
235 #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
236 #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT
239 /* This is run once per compilation to set up which modes can be used
240 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. */
243 init_expr_once (void)
246 enum machine_mode mode;
251 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
252 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
253 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
254 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
255 mem1 = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, frame_pointer_rtx);
257 /* A scratch register we can modify in-place below to avoid
258 useless RTL allocations. */
259 reg = gen_rtx_REG (VOIDmode, -1);
261 insn = rtx_alloc (INSN);
262 pat = gen_rtx_SET (0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
263 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
265 for (mode = VOIDmode; (int) mode < NUM_MACHINE_MODES;
266 mode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) mode + 1))
270 direct_load[(int) mode] = direct_store[(int) mode] = 0;
271 PUT_MODE (mem, mode);
272 PUT_MODE (mem1, mode);
273 PUT_MODE (reg, mode);
275 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
276 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
278 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode)
279 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
280 && (direct_load[(int) mode] == 0 || direct_store[(int) mode] == 0);
283 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode))
286 SET_REGNO (reg, regno);
289 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
290 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
291 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
293 SET_SRC (pat) = mem1;
294 SET_DEST (pat) = reg;
295 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
296 direct_load[(int) mode] = 1;
299 SET_DEST (pat) = mem;
300 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
301 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
304 SET_DEST (pat) = mem1;
305 if (recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers) >= 0)
306 direct_store[(int) mode] = 1;
310 mem = gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_raw_REG (Pmode, 10000));
312 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); mode != VOIDmode;
313 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
315 enum machine_mode srcmode;
316 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_FLOAT); srcmode != mode;
317 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
321 ic = can_extend_p (mode, srcmode, 0);
322 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
325 PUT_MODE (mem, srcmode);
327 if ((*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (mem, srcmode))
328 float_extend_from_mem[mode][srcmode] = true;
333 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
338 cfun->expr = ggc_alloc_cleared (sizeof (struct expr_status));
341 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
342 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
343 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
344 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
347 convert_move (rtx to, rtx from, int unsignedp)
349 enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
350 enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
351 int to_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode);
352 int from_real = SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode);
356 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
357 enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp < 0 ? UNKNOWN
358 : (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND));
361 gcc_assert (to_real == from_real);
362 gcc_assert (to_mode != BLKmode);
363 gcc_assert (from_mode != BLKmode);
365 /* If the source and destination are already the same, then there's
370 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
371 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
374 if (GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from)
375 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from)))
376 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode))
377 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from) == unsignedp)
378 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, from), from_mode = to_mode;
380 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (to) != SUBREG || !SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to));
382 if (to_mode == from_mode
383 || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from)))
385 emit_move_insn (to, from);
389 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode) || VECTOR_MODE_P (from_mode))
391 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode));
393 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (to_mode))
394 from = simplify_gen_subreg (to_mode, from, GET_MODE (from), 0);
396 to = simplify_gen_subreg (from_mode, to, GET_MODE (to), 0);
398 emit_move_insn (to, from);
402 if (GET_CODE (to) == CONCAT && GET_CODE (from) == CONCAT)
404 convert_move (XEXP (to, 0), XEXP (from, 0), unsignedp);
405 convert_move (XEXP (to, 1), XEXP (from, 1), unsignedp);
414 gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode)
415 != GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
416 || (DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode)
417 != DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (to_mode)));
419 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
420 /* Conversion between decimal float and binary float, same size. */
421 tab = DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (from_mode) ? trunc_optab : sext_optab;
422 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))
427 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
429 code = convert_optab_handler (tab, to_mode, from_mode)->insn_code;
430 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
432 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from,
433 tab == sext_optab ? FLOAT_EXTEND : FLOAT_TRUNCATE);
437 /* Otherwise use a libcall. */
438 libcall = convert_optab_handler (tab, to_mode, from_mode)->libfunc;
440 /* Is this conversion implemented yet? */
441 gcc_assert (libcall);
444 value = emit_library_call_value (libcall, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, to_mode,
446 insns = get_insns ();
448 emit_libcall_block (insns, to, value,
449 tab == trunc_optab ? gen_rtx_FLOAT_TRUNCATE (to_mode,
451 : gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (to_mode, from));
455 /* Handle pointer conversion. */ /* SPEE 900220. */
456 /* Targets are expected to provide conversion insns between PxImode and
457 xImode for all MODE_PARTIAL_INT modes they use, but no others. */
458 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
460 enum machine_mode full_mode
461 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode), MODE_INT);
463 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab, to_mode, full_mode)->insn_code
464 != CODE_FOR_nothing);
466 if (full_mode != from_mode)
467 from = convert_to_mode (full_mode, from, unsignedp);
468 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab, to_mode, full_mode)->insn_code,
472 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
475 enum machine_mode full_mode
476 = smallest_mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode), MODE_INT);
478 gcc_assert (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab, full_mode, from_mode)->insn_code
479 != CODE_FOR_nothing);
481 if (to_mode == full_mode)
483 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab, full_mode, from_mode)->insn_code,
488 new_from = gen_reg_rtx (full_mode);
489 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (sext_optab, full_mode, from_mode)->insn_code,
490 new_from, from, UNKNOWN);
492 /* else proceed to integer conversions below. */
493 from_mode = full_mode;
497 /* Now both modes are integers. */
499 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
500 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
501 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
508 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode;
509 int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD);
511 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
512 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
515 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
516 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
517 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
518 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
519 if (optimize > 0 && GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG)
520 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
521 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
524 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
525 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD
526 && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp))
527 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
531 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from))
532 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
533 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, to));
535 convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp);
536 emit_unop_insn (code, to,
537 gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code);
541 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
544 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure
545 that the source does not overlap the target. */
547 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to, from))
548 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
550 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
551 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
552 lowpart_mode = word_mode;
554 lowpart_mode = from_mode;
556 lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp);
558 lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to);
559 emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom);
561 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
563 fill_value = const0_rtx;
568 && insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_slt].operand[0].mode == word_mode
569 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
571 emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX,
573 fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
574 emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value));
580 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom,
581 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1),
583 fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1);
587 /* Fill the remaining words. */
588 for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++)
590 int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
591 rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode);
593 gcc_assert (subword);
595 if (fill_value != subword)
596 emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value);
599 insns = get_insns ();
602 emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, NULL_RTX,
603 gen_rtx_fmt_e (equiv_code, to_mode, copy_rtx (from)));
607 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
608 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD
609 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD)
612 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
613 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
614 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
616 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
617 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
618 convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0);
622 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
623 no more than a word long. */
625 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
626 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)
627 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
628 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)))
631 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
632 && direct_load[(int) to_mode]
633 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
635 || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
636 from = force_reg (from_mode, from);
637 if (REG_P (from) && REGNO (from) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
638 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from), to_mode))
639 from = copy_to_reg (from);
640 emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
644 /* Handle extension. */
645 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
647 /* Convert directly if that works. */
648 if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
651 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
656 enum machine_mode intermediate;
660 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
661 for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode;
662 intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate))
663 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp)
665 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate)
666 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
667 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (intermediate))))
668 && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp)
669 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
671 convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from,
672 unsignedp), unsignedp);
676 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
677 Generate what we need with shifts. */
678 shift_amount = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
679 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
680 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode));
681 from = gen_lowpart (to_mode, force_reg (from_mode, from));
682 tmp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, from, shift_amount,
684 tmp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, to_mode, tmp, shift_amount,
687 emit_move_insn (to, tmp);
692 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
693 if (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab, to_mode, from_mode)->insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
695 emit_unop_insn (convert_optab_handler (trunc_optab, to_mode, from_mode)->insn_code,
700 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
701 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
702 and for which there was no special instruction.
704 ??? Code above formerly short-circuited this, for most integer
705 mode pairs, with a force_reg in from_mode followed by a recursive
706 call to this routine. Appears always to have been wrong. */
707 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
709 rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
710 emit_move_insn (to, temp);
714 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
718 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
719 from converting X to mode MODE.
720 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
721 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
722 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
723 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion. */
726 convert_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, int unsignedp)
728 return convert_modes (mode, VOIDmode, x, unsignedp);
731 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
732 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
733 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
734 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
736 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
737 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
739 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode. */
742 convert_modes (enum machine_mode mode, enum machine_mode oldmode, rtx x, int unsignedp)
746 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
747 the required extension, strip it. */
749 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
750 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
751 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x) == unsignedp)
752 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
754 if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode)
755 oldmode = GET_MODE (x);
760 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
761 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
762 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
763 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
764 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
766 if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
767 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
768 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0)
770 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
772 if (oldmode != VOIDmode
773 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode))
775 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
777 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
778 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
781 return immed_double_const (val, (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, mode);
784 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
785 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
786 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
787 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
789 if ((GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT
790 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
791 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
792 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode) == MODE_INT
793 && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
794 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode)
795 && ((MEM_P (x) && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
796 && direct_load[(int) mode])
798 && (! HARD_REGISTER_P (x)
799 || HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (x), mode))
800 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode),
801 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))))))
803 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
804 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
805 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
806 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && oldmode != VOIDmode
807 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode))
809 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (x);
810 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode);
812 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
813 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
814 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
816 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1))))
817 val |= (HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width;
819 return gen_int_mode (val, mode);
822 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
825 /* Converting from integer constant into mode is always equivalent to an
827 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode) && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
829 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode));
830 return simplify_gen_subreg (mode, x, oldmode, 0);
833 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
834 convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp);
838 /* STORE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time that we can
839 store efficiently. Due to internal GCC limitations, this is
840 MOVE_MAX_PIECES limited by the number of bytes GCC can represent
841 for an immediate constant. */
843 #define STORE_MAX_PIECES MIN (MOVE_MAX_PIECES, 2 * sizeof (HOST_WIDE_INT))
845 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes can be moved by using several move
846 instructions. Return nonzero if a call to move_by_pieces should
850 can_move_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
851 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
853 return MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align);
856 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes from block FROM to
857 block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
859 If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined and TO is NULL, emit_single_push_insn is
860 used to push FROM to the stack.
862 ALIGN is maximum stack alignment we can assume.
864 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
865 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
869 move_by_pieces (rtx to, rtx from, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
870 unsigned int align, int endp)
872 struct move_by_pieces data;
873 rtx to_addr, from_addr = XEXP (from, 0);
874 unsigned int max_size = MOVE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
875 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
876 enum insn_code icode;
878 align = MIN (to ? MEM_ALIGN (to) : align, MEM_ALIGN (from));
881 data.from_addr = from_addr;
884 to_addr = XEXP (to, 0);
887 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
888 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
890 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
897 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
903 data.to_addr = to_addr;
906 = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC
907 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC
908 || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC);
910 data.explicit_inc_from = 0;
911 data.explicit_inc_to = 0;
912 if (data.reverse) data.offset = len;
915 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
916 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
917 and use post-increment if available. */
918 if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to)
919 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align, max_size) > 2)
921 /* Find the mode of the largest move... */
922 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
923 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
924 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
927 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from)
929 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len));
930 data.autinc_from = 1;
931 data.explicit_inc_from = -1;
933 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.autinc_from)
935 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
936 data.autinc_from = 1;
937 data.explicit_inc_from = 1;
939 if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr))
940 data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
941 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
943 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len));
945 data.explicit_inc_to = -1;
947 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
949 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
951 data.explicit_inc_to = 1;
953 if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
954 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
957 tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
958 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
959 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
962 enum machine_mode xmode;
964 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
966 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
967 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES
968 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
971 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
974 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
975 successively smaller modes. */
979 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
980 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
981 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
984 if (mode == VOIDmode)
987 icode = optab_handler (mov_optab, mode)->insn_code;
988 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
989 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data);
991 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
994 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
995 gcc_assert (!data.len);
1001 gcc_assert (!data.reverse);
1006 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0)
1007 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx));
1009 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr,
1012 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr,
1019 to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset);
1027 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1028 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1030 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1031 move_by_pieces_ninsns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l, unsigned int align,
1032 unsigned int max_size)
1034 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n_insns = 0;
1035 enum machine_mode tmode;
1037 tmode = mode_for_size (MOVE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
1038 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
1039 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
1042 enum machine_mode tmode, xmode;
1044 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
1046 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1047 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > MOVE_MAX_PIECES
1048 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
1051 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
1054 while (max_size > 1)
1056 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
1057 enum insn_code icode;
1059 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
1060 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
1061 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
1064 if (mode == VOIDmode)
1067 icode = optab_handler (mov_optab, mode)->insn_code;
1068 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1069 n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1071 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1078 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1079 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1080 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1083 move_by_pieces_1 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode,
1084 struct move_by_pieces *data)
1086 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1087 rtx to1 = NULL_RTX, from1;
1089 while (data->len >= size)
1092 data->offset -= size;
1096 if (data->autinc_to)
1097 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
1100 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
1103 if (data->autinc_from)
1104 from1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->from, mode, data->from_addr,
1107 from1 = adjust_address (data->from, mode, data->offset);
1109 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
1110 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
1111 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1112 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from < 0)
1113 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
1114 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)size)));
1117 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1));
1120 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
1121 emit_single_push_insn (mode, from1, NULL);
1127 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
1128 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1129 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_from > 0)
1130 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
1132 if (! data->reverse)
1133 data->offset += size;
1139 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X. This may be done with
1140 string-move instructions, with multiple scalar move instructions,
1141 or with a library call.
1143 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE) with mode BLKmode.
1144 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1145 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have.
1146 METHOD describes what kind of copy this is, and what mechanisms may be used.
1148 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1152 emit_block_move_hints (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method,
1153 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
1161 case BLOCK_OP_NORMAL:
1162 case BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL:
1163 may_use_call = true;
1166 case BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM:
1167 may_use_call = block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm ();
1169 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
1170 to force it to pop the arguments right away. */
1174 case BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL:
1175 may_use_call = false;
1182 align = MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x), MEM_ALIGN (y));
1184 gcc_assert (MEM_P (x));
1185 gcc_assert (MEM_P (y));
1188 /* Make sure we've got BLKmode addresses; store_one_arg can decide that
1189 block copy is more efficient for other large modes, e.g. DCmode. */
1190 x = adjust_address (x, BLKmode, 0);
1191 y = adjust_address (y, BLKmode, 0);
1193 /* Set MEM_SIZE as appropriate for this block copy. The main place this
1194 can be incorrect is coming from __builtin_memcpy. */
1195 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
1197 if (INTVAL (size) == 0)
1200 x = shallow_copy_rtx (x);
1201 y = shallow_copy_rtx (y);
1202 set_mem_size (x, size);
1203 set_mem_size (y, size);
1206 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
1207 move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align, 0);
1208 else if (emit_block_move_via_movmem (x, y, size, align,
1209 expected_align, expected_size))
1211 else if (may_use_call)
1212 retval = emit_block_move_via_libcall (x, y, size,
1213 method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
1215 emit_block_move_via_loop (x, y, size, align);
1217 if (method == BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM)
1224 emit_block_move (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method)
1226 return emit_block_move_hints (x, y, size, method, 0, -1);
1229 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Returns true if calling the
1230 block move libcall will not clobber any parameters which may have
1231 already been placed on the stack. */
1234 block_move_libcall_safe_for_call_parm (void)
1236 /* If arguments are pushed on the stack, then they're safe. */
1240 /* If registers go on the stack anyway, any argument is sure to clobber
1241 an outgoing argument. */
1242 #if defined (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1243 if (OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE)
1246 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1247 if (REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (fn) != 0)
1252 /* If any argument goes in memory, then it might clobber an outgoing
1255 CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far;
1258 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (false);
1259 INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, TREE_TYPE (fn), NULL_RTX, 0, 3);
1261 arg = TYPE_ARG_TYPES (TREE_TYPE (fn));
1262 for ( ; arg != void_list_node ; arg = TREE_CHAIN (arg))
1264 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_VALUE (arg));
1265 rtx tmp = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1266 if (!tmp || !REG_P (tmp))
1268 if (targetm.calls.arg_partial_bytes (&args_so_far, mode, NULL, 1))
1270 FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, NULL_TREE, 1);
1276 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a movmem pattern;
1277 return true if successful. */
1280 emit_block_move_via_movmem (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size, unsigned int align,
1281 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
1283 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
1284 int save_volatile_ok = volatile_ok;
1285 enum machine_mode mode;
1287 if (expected_align < align)
1288 expected_align = align;
1290 /* Since this is a move insn, we don't care about volatility. */
1293 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1294 including more than one in the machine description unless
1295 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1297 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
1298 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
1300 enum insn_code code = movmem_optab[(int) mode];
1301 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
1303 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
1304 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1305 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1306 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1307 actual mode mask. */
1308 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
1309 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
1310 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
1311 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
1312 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
1313 || (*pred) (x, BLKmode))
1314 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate) == 0
1315 || (*pred) (y, BLKmode))
1316 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0
1317 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
1320 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
1323 op2 = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
1324 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate;
1325 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (op2, mode))
1326 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op2);
1328 /* ??? When called via emit_block_move_for_call, it'd be
1329 nice if there were some way to inform the backend, so
1330 that it doesn't fail the expansion because it thinks
1331 emitting the libcall would be more efficient. */
1333 if (insn_data[(int) code].n_operands == 4)
1334 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign);
1336 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (x, y, op2, opalign,
1337 GEN_INT (expected_align),
1338 GEN_INT (expected_size));
1342 volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok;
1346 delete_insns_since (last);
1350 volatile_ok = save_volatile_ok;
1354 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Expand a call to memcpy.
1355 Return the return value from memcpy, 0 otherwise. */
1358 emit_block_move_via_libcall (rtx dst, rtx src, rtx size, bool tailcall)
1360 rtx dst_addr, src_addr;
1361 tree call_expr, fn, src_tree, dst_tree, size_tree;
1362 enum machine_mode size_mode;
1365 /* Emit code to copy the addresses of DST and SRC and SIZE into new
1366 pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and
1369 dst_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (dst, 0));
1370 src_addr = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (src, 0));
1372 dst_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, dst_addr);
1373 src_addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, src_addr);
1375 dst_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, dst_addr);
1376 src_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, src_addr);
1378 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
1380 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
1381 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
1383 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1384 memcpy in this context. This could be a user call to memcpy and
1385 the user may wish to examine the return value from memcpy. For
1386 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1387 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
1389 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
1391 fn = emit_block_move_libcall_fn (true);
1392 call_expr = build_call_expr (fn, 3, dst_tree, src_tree, size_tree);
1393 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall;
1395 retval = expand_normal (call_expr);
1400 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move_via_libcall. Create the tree node
1401 for the function we use for block copies. The first time FOR_CALL
1402 is true, we call assemble_external. */
1404 static GTY(()) tree block_move_fn;
1407 init_block_move_fn (const char *asmspec)
1413 fn = get_identifier ("memcpy");
1414 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
1415 const_ptr_type_node, sizetype,
1418 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
1419 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
1420 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
1421 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
1422 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
1423 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT;
1424 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1;
1430 set_user_assembler_name (block_move_fn, asmspec);
1434 emit_block_move_libcall_fn (int for_call)
1436 static bool emitted_extern;
1439 init_block_move_fn (NULL);
1441 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
1443 emitted_extern = true;
1444 make_decl_rtl (block_move_fn);
1445 assemble_external (block_move_fn);
1448 return block_move_fn;
1451 /* A subroutine of emit_block_move. Copy the data via an explicit
1452 loop. This is used only when libcalls are forbidden. */
1453 /* ??? It'd be nice to copy in hunks larger than QImode. */
1456 emit_block_move_via_loop (rtx x, rtx y, rtx size,
1457 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1459 rtx cmp_label, top_label, iter, x_addr, y_addr, tmp;
1460 enum machine_mode iter_mode;
1462 iter_mode = GET_MODE (size);
1463 if (iter_mode == VOIDmode)
1464 iter_mode = word_mode;
1466 top_label = gen_label_rtx ();
1467 cmp_label = gen_label_rtx ();
1468 iter = gen_reg_rtx (iter_mode);
1470 emit_move_insn (iter, const0_rtx);
1472 x_addr = force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
1473 y_addr = force_operand (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
1474 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
1476 emit_jump (cmp_label);
1477 emit_label (top_label);
1479 tmp = convert_modes (Pmode, iter_mode, iter, true);
1480 x_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, x_addr, tmp);
1481 y_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, y_addr, tmp);
1482 x = change_address (x, QImode, x_addr);
1483 y = change_address (y, QImode, y_addr);
1485 emit_move_insn (x, y);
1487 tmp = expand_simple_binop (iter_mode, PLUS, iter, const1_rtx, iter,
1488 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
1490 emit_move_insn (iter, tmp);
1492 emit_label (cmp_label);
1494 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (iter, size, LT, NULL_RTX, iter_mode,
1498 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1499 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1502 move_block_to_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs, enum machine_mode mode)
1505 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1513 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
1514 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
1516 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1517 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1518 if (HAVE_load_multiple)
1520 last = get_last_insn ();
1521 pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno), x,
1529 delete_insns_since (last);
1533 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
1534 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i),
1535 operand_subword_force (x, i, mode));
1538 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1539 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1542 move_block_from_reg (int regno, rtx x, int nregs)
1549 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1550 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1551 if (HAVE_store_multiple)
1553 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
1554 rtx pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno),
1562 delete_insns_since (last);
1566 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
1568 rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode);
1572 emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode, regno + i));
1576 /* Generate a PARALLEL rtx for a new non-consecutive group of registers from
1577 ORIG, where ORIG is a non-consecutive group of registers represented by
1578 a PARALLEL. The clone is identical to the original except in that the
1579 original set of registers is replaced by a new set of pseudo registers.
1580 The new set has the same modes as the original set. */
1583 gen_group_rtx (rtx orig)
1588 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (orig) == PARALLEL);
1590 length = XVECLEN (orig, 0);
1591 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * length);
1593 /* Skip a NULL entry in first slot. */
1594 i = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1;
1599 for (; i < length; i++)
1601 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 0));
1602 rtx offset = XEXP (XVECEXP (orig, 0, i), 1);
1604 tmps[i] = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_reg_rtx (mode), offset);
1607 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (orig), gen_rtvec_v (length, tmps));
1610 /* A subroutine of emit_group_load. Arguments as for emit_group_load,
1611 except that values are placed in TMPS[i], and must later be moved
1612 into corresponding XEXP (XVECEXP (DST, 0, i), 0) element. */
1615 emit_group_load_1 (rtx *tmps, rtx dst, rtx orig_src, tree type, int ssize)
1619 enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_src);
1621 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL);
1624 && !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m)
1625 && !MEM_P (orig_src)
1626 && GET_CODE (orig_src) != CONCAT)
1628 enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_src));
1629 if (imode == BLKmode)
1630 src = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_src), ssize, 0);
1632 src = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
1633 if (imode != BLKmode)
1634 src = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_src), src);
1635 emit_move_insn (src, orig_src);
1636 /* ...and back again. */
1637 if (imode != BLKmode)
1638 src = gen_lowpart (imode, src);
1639 emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize);
1643 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1644 both on the stack and in registers. */
1645 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, 0), 0))
1650 /* Process the pieces. */
1651 for (i = start; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
1653 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0));
1654 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 1));
1655 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
1658 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1659 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
1661 /* Arrange to shift the fragment to where it belongs.
1662 extract_bit_field loads to the lsb of the reg. */
1664 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
1665 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_src), type, i == start)
1666 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward)
1671 shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
1672 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
1673 gcc_assert (bytelen > 0);
1676 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1677 from strange tricks we might play; but make sure that the source can
1678 be loaded directly into the destination. */
1680 if (!MEM_P (orig_src)
1681 && (!CONSTANT_P (orig_src)
1682 || (GET_MODE (orig_src) != mode
1683 && GET_MODE (orig_src) != VOIDmode)))
1685 if (GET_MODE (orig_src) == VOIDmode)
1686 src = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1688 src = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src));
1690 emit_move_insn (src, orig_src);
1693 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1695 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (src))
1696 || MEM_ALIGN (src) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
1697 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
1698 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
1700 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1701 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], adjust_address (src, mode, bytepos));
1703 else if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode)
1704 && GET_MODE (src) == mode
1705 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
1706 /* Let emit_move_complex do the bulk of the work. */
1708 else if (GET_CODE (src) == CONCAT)
1710 unsigned int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src));
1711 unsigned int slen0 = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)));
1713 if ((bytepos == 0 && bytelen == slen0)
1714 || (bytepos != 0 && bytepos + bytelen <= slen))
1716 /* The following assumes that the concatenated objects all
1717 have the same size. In this case, a simple calculation
1718 can be used to determine the object and the bit field
1720 tmps[i] = XEXP (src, bytepos / slen0);
1721 if (! CONSTANT_P (tmps[i])
1722 && (!REG_P (tmps[i]) || GET_MODE (tmps[i]) != mode))
1723 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (tmps[i], bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1724 (bytepos % slen0) * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1725 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode);
1731 gcc_assert (!bytepos);
1732 mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0);
1733 emit_move_insn (mem, src);
1734 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (mem, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1735 0, 1, NULL_RTX, mode, mode);
1738 /* FIXME: A SIMD parallel will eventually lead to a subreg of a
1739 SIMD register, which is currently broken. While we get GCC
1740 to emit proper RTL for these cases, let's dump to memory. */
1741 else if (VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dst))
1744 int slen = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src));
1747 mem = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (src), slen, 0);
1748 emit_move_insn (mem, src);
1749 tmps[i] = adjust_address (mem, mode, (int) bytepos);
1751 else if (CONSTANT_P (src) && GET_MODE (dst) != BLKmode
1752 && XVECLEN (dst, 0) > 1)
1753 tmps[i] = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, src, GET_MODE(dst), bytepos);
1754 else if (CONSTANT_P (src)
1755 || (REG_P (src) && GET_MODE (src) == mode))
1758 tmps[i] = extract_bit_field (src, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT,
1759 bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT, 1, NULL_RTX,
1763 tmps[i] = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i],
1764 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift), tmps[i], 0);
1768 /* Emit code to move a block SRC of type TYPE to a block DST,
1769 where DST is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1770 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_SRC in bytes, or -1
1774 emit_group_load (rtx dst, rtx src, tree type, int ssize)
1779 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * XVECLEN (dst, 0));
1780 emit_group_load_1 (tmps, dst, src, type, ssize);
1782 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1783 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (dst, 0); i++)
1785 rtx d = XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0);
1788 emit_move_insn (d, tmps[i]);
1792 /* Similar, but load SRC into new pseudos in a format that looks like
1793 PARALLEL. This can later be fed to emit_group_move to get things
1794 in the right place. */
1797 emit_group_load_into_temps (rtx parallel, rtx src, tree type, int ssize)
1802 vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (parallel, 0));
1803 emit_group_load_1 (&RTVEC_ELT (vec, 0), parallel, src, type, ssize);
1805 /* Convert the vector to look just like the original PARALLEL, except
1806 with the computed values. */
1807 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (parallel, 0); i++)
1809 rtx e = XVECEXP (parallel, 0, i);
1810 rtx d = XEXP (e, 0);
1814 d = force_reg (GET_MODE (d), RTVEC_ELT (vec, i));
1815 e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), d, XEXP (e, 1));
1817 RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e;
1820 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (parallel), vec);
1823 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to block DST, where SRC and DST are
1824 non-consecutive groups of registers, each represented by a PARALLEL. */
1827 emit_group_move (rtx dst, rtx src)
1831 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL
1832 && GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL
1833 && XVECLEN (src, 0) == XVECLEN (dst, 0));
1835 /* Skip first entry if NULL. */
1836 for (i = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0) ? 0 : 1; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
1837 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst, 0, i), 0),
1838 XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0));
1841 /* Move a group of registers represented by a PARALLEL into pseudos. */
1844 emit_group_move_into_temps (rtx src)
1846 rtvec vec = rtvec_alloc (XVECLEN (src, 0));
1849 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (src, 0); i++)
1851 rtx e = XVECEXP (src, 0, i);
1852 rtx d = XEXP (e, 0);
1855 e = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_NOTE_KIND (e), copy_to_reg (d), XEXP (e, 1));
1856 RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = e;
1859 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (src), vec);
1862 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block ORIG_DST of type TYPE,
1863 where SRC is non-consecutive registers represented by a PARALLEL.
1864 SSIZE represents the total size of block ORIG_DST, or -1 if not
1868 emit_group_store (rtx orig_dst, rtx src, tree type ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int ssize)
1871 int start, finish, i;
1872 enum machine_mode m = GET_MODE (orig_dst);
1874 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (src) == PARALLEL);
1876 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (m)
1877 && !MEM_P (orig_dst) && GET_CODE (orig_dst) != CONCAT)
1879 enum machine_mode imode = int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (orig_dst));
1880 if (imode == BLKmode)
1881 dst = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (orig_dst), ssize, 0);
1883 dst = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
1884 emit_group_store (dst, src, type, ssize);
1885 if (imode != BLKmode)
1886 dst = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (orig_dst), dst);
1887 emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst);
1891 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1892 both on the stack and in registers. */
1893 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, 0), 0))
1897 finish = XVECLEN (src, 0);
1899 tmps = alloca (sizeof (rtx) * finish);
1901 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
1902 for (i = start; i < finish; i++)
1904 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 0);
1905 if (!REG_P (reg) || REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1907 tmps[i] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg));
1908 emit_move_insn (tmps[i], reg);
1914 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
1915 from strange tricks we might play. */
1917 if (GET_CODE (dst) == PARALLEL)
1921 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
1922 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
1923 so no action is necessary. */
1924 if (rtx_equal_p (dst, src))
1927 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
1928 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
1931 temp = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst), ssize, 0);
1932 emit_group_store (temp, src, type, ssize);
1933 emit_group_load (dst, temp, type, ssize);
1936 else if (!MEM_P (dst) && GET_CODE (dst) != CONCAT)
1938 enum machine_mode outer = GET_MODE (dst);
1939 enum machine_mode inner;
1940 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos;
1944 if (!REG_P (dst) || REGNO (dst) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1945 dst = gen_reg_rtx (outer);
1947 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
1948 /* If the first element of the vector is the low part
1949 of the destination mode, use a paradoxical subreg to
1950 initialize the destination. */
1953 inner = GET_MODE (tmps[start]);
1954 bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer);
1955 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, start), 1)) == bytepos)
1957 temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[start],
1961 emit_move_insn (dst, temp);
1968 /* If the first element wasn't the low part, try the last. */
1970 && start < finish - 1)
1972 inner = GET_MODE (tmps[finish - 1]);
1973 bytepos = subreg_lowpart_offset (inner, outer);
1974 if (INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, finish - 1), 1)) == bytepos)
1976 temp = simplify_gen_subreg (outer, tmps[finish - 1],
1980 emit_move_insn (dst, temp);
1987 /* Otherwise, simply initialize the result to zero. */
1989 emit_move_insn (dst, CONST0_RTX (outer));
1992 /* Process the pieces. */
1993 for (i = start; i < finish; i++)
1995 HOST_WIDE_INT bytepos = INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src, 0, i), 1));
1996 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (tmps[i]);
1997 unsigned int bytelen = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2000 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2001 if (ssize >= 0 && bytepos + (HOST_WIDE_INT) bytelen > ssize)
2003 /* store_bit_field always takes its value from the lsb.
2004 Move the fragment to the lsb if it's not already there. */
2006 #ifdef BLOCK_REG_PADDING
2007 BLOCK_REG_PADDING (GET_MODE (orig_dst), type, i == start)
2008 == (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? upward : downward)
2014 int shift = (bytelen - (ssize - bytepos)) * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2015 tmps[i] = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, mode, tmps[i],
2016 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, shift),
2019 bytelen = ssize - bytepos;
2022 if (GET_CODE (dst) == CONCAT)
2024 if (bytepos + bytelen <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2025 dest = XEXP (dst, 0);
2026 else if (bytepos >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0))))
2028 bytepos -= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (dst, 0)));
2029 dest = XEXP (dst, 1);
2033 gcc_assert (bytepos == 0 && XVECLEN (src, 0));
2034 dest = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dest),
2035 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)), 0);
2036 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, GET_MODE (tmps[i]), bytepos),
2043 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2045 && (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (dest))
2046 || MEM_ALIGN (dest) >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2047 && bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 0
2048 && bytelen == GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2049 emit_move_insn (adjust_address (dest, mode, bytepos), tmps[i]);
2051 store_bit_field (dest, bytelen * BITS_PER_UNIT, bytepos * BITS_PER_UNIT,
2055 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2056 if (orig_dst != dst)
2057 emit_move_insn (orig_dst, dst);
2060 /* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a
2061 set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK
2062 is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned.
2064 The purpose of this routine is to handle functions that return
2065 BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines (the PA for example)
2066 want to return all small structures in registers regardless of the
2067 structure's alignment. */
2070 copy_blkmode_from_reg (rtx tgtblk, rtx srcreg, tree type)
2072 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
2073 rtx src = NULL, dst = NULL;
2074 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type), BITS_PER_WORD);
2075 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, xbitpos, padding_correction = 0;
2079 tgtblk = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
2081 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST)),
2083 preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk);
2086 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't, copy it
2087 into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2089 if (GET_MODE (srcreg) != BLKmode
2090 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg)) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
2091 srcreg = convert_to_mode (word_mode, srcreg, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type));
2093 /* If the structure doesn't take up a whole number of words, see whether
2094 SRCREG is padded on the left or on the right. If it's on the left,
2095 set PADDING_CORRECTION to the number of bits to skip.
2097 In most ABIs, the structure will be returned at the least end of
2098 the register, which translates to right padding on little-endian
2099 targets and left padding on big-endian targets. The opposite
2100 holds if the structure is returned at the most significant
2101 end of the register. */
2102 if (bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD != 0
2103 && (targetm.calls.return_in_msb (type)
2105 : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN))
2107 = (BITS_PER_WORD - ((bytes % UNITS_PER_WORD) * BITS_PER_UNIT));
2109 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bites at a time.
2111 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines which do not use
2112 strict alignment, but it doesn't seem worth the effort at the current
2114 for (bitpos = 0, xbitpos = padding_correction;
2115 bitpos < bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT;
2116 bitpos += bitsize, xbitpos += bitsize)
2118 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2119 word boundary and when xbitpos == padding_correction
2120 (the first time through). */
2121 if (xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
2122 || xbitpos == padding_correction)
2123 src = operand_subword_force (srcreg, xbitpos / BITS_PER_WORD,
2126 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2128 if (bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0)
2129 dst = operand_subword (tgtblk, bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD, 1, BLKmode);
2131 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2132 xbitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2133 store_bit_field (dst, bitsize, bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, word_mode,
2134 extract_bit_field (src, bitsize,
2135 xbitpos % BITS_PER_WORD, 1,
2136 NULL_RTX, word_mode, word_mode));
2142 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2143 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2146 use_reg (rtx *call_fusage, rtx reg)
2148 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg) && REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
2151 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
2152 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, reg), *call_fusage);
2155 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2156 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2159 use_regs (rtx *call_fusage, int regno, int nregs)
2163 gcc_assert (regno + nregs <= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
2165 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
2166 use_reg (call_fusage, regno_reg_rtx[regno + i]);
2169 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2170 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2171 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2174 use_group_regs (rtx *call_fusage, rtx regs)
2178 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (regs, 0); i++)
2180 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (regs, 0, i), 0);
2182 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2183 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2184 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2185 if (reg != 0 && REG_P (reg))
2186 use_reg (call_fusage, reg);
2191 /* Determine whether the LEN bytes generated by CONSTFUN can be
2192 stored to memory using several move instructions. CONSTFUNDATA is
2193 a pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2194 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. Return nonzero if a
2195 call to store_by_pieces should succeed. */
2198 can_store_by_pieces (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
2199 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode),
2200 void *constfundata, unsigned int align)
2202 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l;
2203 unsigned int max_size;
2204 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
2205 enum machine_mode mode, tmode;
2206 enum insn_code icode;
2213 if (! STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align))
2216 tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
2217 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
2218 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
2221 enum machine_mode xmode;
2223 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
2225 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2226 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES
2227 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
2230 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
2233 /* We would first store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2234 successively smaller modes. */
2237 reverse <= (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT || HAVE_POST_DECREMENT);
2242 max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2243 while (max_size > 1)
2245 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2246 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2247 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2250 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2253 icode = optab_handler (mov_optab, mode)->insn_code;
2254 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
2255 && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2257 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2264 cst = (*constfun) (constfundata, offset, mode);
2265 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (cst))
2275 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2278 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2285 /* Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes generated by
2286 CONSTFUN to block TO. (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). CONSTFUNDATA is a
2287 pointer which will be passed as argument in every CONSTFUN call.
2288 ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume.
2289 If ENDP is 0 return to, if ENDP is 1 return memory at the end ala
2290 mempcpy, and if ENDP is 2 return memory the end minus one byte ala
2294 store_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len,
2295 rtx (*constfun) (void *, HOST_WIDE_INT, enum machine_mode),
2296 void *constfundata, unsigned int align, int endp)
2298 struct store_by_pieces data;
2302 gcc_assert (endp != 2);
2306 gcc_assert (STORE_BY_PIECES_P (len, align));
2307 data.constfun = constfun;
2308 data.constfundata = constfundata;
2311 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2316 gcc_assert (!data.reverse);
2321 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data.explicit_inc_to > 0)
2322 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data.to_addr, constm1_rtx));
2324 data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (data.to_addr,
2327 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data.to, QImode, data.to_addr,
2334 to1 = adjust_address (data.to, QImode, data.offset);
2342 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2343 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2346 clear_by_pieces (rtx to, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, unsigned int align)
2348 struct store_by_pieces data;
2353 data.constfun = clear_by_pieces_1;
2354 data.constfundata = NULL;
2357 store_by_pieces_1 (&data, align);
2360 /* Callback routine for clear_by_pieces.
2361 Return const0_rtx unconditionally. */
2364 clear_by_pieces_1 (void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2365 HOST_WIDE_INT offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2366 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
2371 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces and store_by_pieces.
2372 Generate several move instructions to store LEN bytes of block TO. (A MEM
2373 rtx with BLKmode). ALIGN is maximum alignment we can assume. */
2376 store_by_pieces_1 (struct store_by_pieces *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
2377 unsigned int align ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
2379 rtx to_addr = XEXP (data->to, 0);
2380 unsigned int max_size = STORE_MAX_PIECES + 1;
2381 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
2382 enum insn_code icode;
2385 data->to_addr = to_addr;
2387 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
2388 || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2390 data->explicit_inc_to = 0;
2392 = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
2394 data->offset = data->len;
2396 /* If storing requires more than two move insns,
2397 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2398 and use post-increment if available. */
2399 if (!data->autinc_to
2400 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (data->len, align, max_size) > 2)
2402 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using. */
2403 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2404 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2405 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2408 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode) && data->reverse && ! data->autinc_to)
2410 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, data->len));
2411 data->autinc_to = 1;
2412 data->explicit_inc_to = -1;
2415 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode) && ! data->reverse
2416 && ! data->autinc_to)
2418 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2419 data->autinc_to = 1;
2420 data->explicit_inc_to = 1;
2423 if ( !data->autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
2424 data->to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
2427 tmode = mode_for_size (STORE_MAX_PIECES * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 1);
2428 if (align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode))
2429 align = GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode);
2432 enum machine_mode xmode;
2434 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), xmode = tmode;
2436 xmode = tmode, tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2437 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > STORE_MAX_PIECES
2438 || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (tmode, align))
2441 align = MAX (align, GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (xmode));
2444 /* First store what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2445 successively smaller modes. */
2447 while (max_size > 1)
2449 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT);
2450 tmode != VOIDmode; tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
2451 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
2454 if (mode == VOIDmode)
2457 icode = optab_handler (mov_optab, mode)->insn_code;
2458 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing && align >= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
2459 store_by_pieces_2 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, data);
2461 max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2464 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2465 gcc_assert (!data->len);
2468 /* Subroutine of store_by_pieces_1. Store as many bytes as appropriate
2469 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2470 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2473 store_by_pieces_2 (rtx (*genfun) (rtx, ...), enum machine_mode mode,
2474 struct store_by_pieces *data)
2476 unsigned int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2479 while (data->len >= size)
2482 data->offset -= size;
2484 if (data->autinc_to)
2485 to1 = adjust_automodify_address (data->to, mode, data->to_addr,
2488 to1 = adjust_address (data->to, mode, data->offset);
2490 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
2491 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
2492 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) size)));
2494 cst = (*data->constfun) (data->constfundata, data->offset, mode);
2495 emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, cst));
2497 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT && data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
2498 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr, GEN_INT (size)));
2500 if (! data->reverse)
2501 data->offset += size;
2507 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT. If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is
2508 its length in bytes. */
2511 clear_storage_hints (rtx object, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method,
2512 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
2514 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (object);
2517 gcc_assert (method == BLOCK_OP_NORMAL || method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
2519 /* If OBJECT is not BLKmode and SIZE is the same size as its mode,
2520 just move a zero. Otherwise, do this a piece at a time. */
2522 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2523 && INTVAL (size) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
2525 rtx zero = CONST0_RTX (mode);
2528 emit_move_insn (object, zero);
2532 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode))
2534 zero = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode));
2537 write_complex_part (object, zero, 0);
2538 write_complex_part (object, zero, 1);
2544 if (size == const0_rtx)
2547 align = MEM_ALIGN (object);
2549 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2550 && CLEAR_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size), align))
2551 clear_by_pieces (object, INTVAL (size), align);
2552 else if (set_storage_via_setmem (object, size, const0_rtx, align,
2553 expected_align, expected_size))
2556 return set_storage_via_libcall (object, size, const0_rtx,
2557 method == BLOCK_OP_TAILCALL);
2563 clear_storage (rtx object, rtx size, enum block_op_methods method)
2565 return clear_storage_hints (object, size, method, 0, -1);
2569 /* A subroutine of clear_storage. Expand a call to memset.
2570 Return the return value of memset, 0 otherwise. */
2573 set_storage_via_libcall (rtx object, rtx size, rtx val, bool tailcall)
2575 tree call_expr, fn, object_tree, size_tree, val_tree;
2576 enum machine_mode size_mode;
2579 /* Emit code to copy OBJECT and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then
2580 place those into new pseudos into a VAR_DECL and use them later. */
2582 object = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (object, 0));
2584 size_mode = TYPE_MODE (sizetype);
2585 size = convert_to_mode (size_mode, size, 1);
2586 size = copy_to_mode_reg (size_mode, size);
2588 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2589 memset in this context. This could be a user call to memset and
2590 the user may wish to examine the return value from memset. For
2591 targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
2592 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code. */
2594 object_tree = make_tree (ptr_type_node, object);
2595 if (GET_CODE (val) != CONST_INT)
2596 val = convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node), val, 1);
2597 size_tree = make_tree (sizetype, size);
2598 val_tree = make_tree (integer_type_node, val);
2600 fn = clear_storage_libcall_fn (true);
2601 call_expr = build_call_expr (fn, 3,
2602 object_tree, integer_zero_node, size_tree);
2603 CALL_EXPR_TAILCALL (call_expr) = tailcall;
2605 retval = expand_normal (call_expr);
2610 /* A subroutine of set_storage_via_libcall. Create the tree node
2611 for the function we use for block clears. The first time FOR_CALL
2612 is true, we call assemble_external. */
2614 static GTY(()) tree block_clear_fn;
2617 init_block_clear_fn (const char *asmspec)
2619 if (!block_clear_fn)
2623 fn = get_identifier ("memset");
2624 args = build_function_type_list (ptr_type_node, ptr_type_node,
2625 integer_type_node, sizetype,
2628 fn = build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL, fn, args);
2629 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn) = 1;
2630 TREE_PUBLIC (fn) = 1;
2631 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn) = 1;
2632 TREE_NOTHROW (fn) = 1;
2633 DECL_VISIBILITY (fn) = VISIBILITY_DEFAULT;
2634 DECL_VISIBILITY_SPECIFIED (fn) = 1;
2636 block_clear_fn = fn;
2640 set_user_assembler_name (block_clear_fn, asmspec);
2644 clear_storage_libcall_fn (int for_call)
2646 static bool emitted_extern;
2648 if (!block_clear_fn)
2649 init_block_clear_fn (NULL);
2651 if (for_call && !emitted_extern)
2653 emitted_extern = true;
2654 make_decl_rtl (block_clear_fn);
2655 assemble_external (block_clear_fn);
2658 return block_clear_fn;
2661 /* Expand a setmem pattern; return true if successful. */
2664 set_storage_via_setmem (rtx object, rtx size, rtx val, unsigned int align,
2665 unsigned int expected_align, HOST_WIDE_INT expected_size)
2667 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2668 including more than one in the machine description unless
2669 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2671 rtx opalign = GEN_INT (align / BITS_PER_UNIT);
2672 enum machine_mode mode;
2674 if (expected_align < align)
2675 expected_align = align;
2677 for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != VOIDmode;
2678 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
2680 enum insn_code code = setmem_optab[(int) mode];
2681 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
2683 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing
2684 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2685 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2686 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2687 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2688 && ((GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
2689 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) INTVAL (size)
2690 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)))
2691 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) >= BITS_PER_WORD)
2692 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[0].predicate) == 0
2693 || (*pred) (object, BLKmode))
2694 && ((pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[3].predicate) == 0
2695 || (*pred) (opalign, VOIDmode)))
2698 enum machine_mode char_mode;
2699 rtx last = get_last_insn ();
2702 opsize = convert_to_mode (mode, size, 1);
2703 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[1].predicate;
2704 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opsize, mode))
2705 opsize = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, opsize);
2708 char_mode = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].mode;
2709 if (char_mode != VOIDmode)
2711 opchar = convert_to_mode (char_mode, opchar, 1);
2712 pred = insn_data[(int) code].operand[2].predicate;
2713 if (pred != 0 && ! (*pred) (opchar, char_mode))
2714 opchar = copy_to_mode_reg (char_mode, opchar);
2717 if (insn_data[(int) code].n_operands == 4)
2718 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, opsize, opchar, opalign);
2720 pat = GEN_FCN ((int) code) (object, opsize, opchar, opalign,
2721 GEN_INT (expected_align),
2722 GEN_INT (expected_size));
2729 delete_insns_since (last);
2737 /* Write to one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Write VAL to
2738 the real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if its true. */
2741 write_complex_part (rtx cplx, rtx val, bool imag_p)
2743 enum machine_mode cmode;
2744 enum machine_mode imode;
2747 if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT)
2749 emit_move_insn (XEXP (cplx, imag_p), val);
2753 cmode = GET_MODE (cplx);
2754 imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode);
2755 ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode);
2757 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2758 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2759 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2760 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2761 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2764 emit_move_insn (adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode,
2765 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0),
2770 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2771 will work. This special case is important, since store_bit_field
2772 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2773 correspond to TCmode. */
2774 if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
2775 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2776 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2777 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2778 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2780 && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2781 && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0))
2783 rtx part = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode,
2784 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2787 emit_move_insn (part, val);
2791 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2792 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD);
2795 store_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0, imode, val);
2798 /* Extract one of the components of the complex value CPLX. Extract the
2799 real part if IMAG_P is false, and the imaginary part if it's true. */
2802 read_complex_part (rtx cplx, bool imag_p)
2804 enum machine_mode cmode, imode;
2807 if (GET_CODE (cplx) == CONCAT)
2808 return XEXP (cplx, imag_p);
2810 cmode = GET_MODE (cplx);
2811 imode = GET_MODE_INNER (cmode);
2812 ibitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode);
2814 /* Special case reads from complex constants that got spilled to memory. */
2815 if (MEM_P (cplx) && GET_CODE (XEXP (cplx, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF)
2817 tree decl = SYMBOL_REF_DECL (XEXP (cplx, 0));
2818 if (decl && TREE_CODE (decl) == COMPLEX_CST)
2820 tree part = imag_p ? TREE_IMAGPART (decl) : TREE_REALPART (decl);
2821 if (CONSTANT_CLASS_P (part))
2822 return expand_expr (part, NULL_RTX, imode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
2826 /* For MEMs simplify_gen_subreg may generate an invalid new address
2827 because, e.g., the original address is considered mode-dependent
2828 by the target, which restricts simplify_subreg from invoking
2829 adjust_address_nv. Instead of preparing fallback support for an
2830 invalid address, we call adjust_address_nv directly. */
2832 return adjust_address_nv (cplx, imode,
2833 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2835 /* If the sub-object is at least word sized, then we know that subregging
2836 will work. This special case is important, since extract_bit_field
2837 wants to operate on integer modes, and there's rarely an OImode to
2838 correspond to TCmode. */
2839 if (ibitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
2840 /* For hard regs we have exact predicates. Assume we can split
2841 the original object if it spans an even number of hard regs.
2842 This special case is important for SCmode on 64-bit platforms
2843 where the natural size of floating-point regs is 32-bit. */
2845 && REGNO (cplx) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2846 && hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (cplx)][cmode] % 2 == 0))
2848 rtx ret = simplify_gen_subreg (imode, cplx, cmode,
2849 imag_p ? GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) : 0);
2853 /* simplify_gen_subreg may fail for sub-word MEMs. */
2854 gcc_assert (MEM_P (cplx) && ibitsize < BITS_PER_WORD);
2857 return extract_bit_field (cplx, ibitsize, imag_p ? ibitsize : 0,
2858 true, NULL_RTX, imode, imode);
2861 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Yet another lowpart generator.
2862 NEW_MODE and OLD_MODE are the same size. Return NULL if X cannot be
2863 represented in NEW_MODE. If FORCE is true, this will never happen, as
2864 we'll force-create a SUBREG if needed. */
2867 emit_move_change_mode (enum machine_mode new_mode,
2868 enum machine_mode old_mode, rtx x, bool force)
2872 if (push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
2874 ret = gen_rtx_MEM (new_mode, XEXP (x, 0));
2875 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (ret, x);
2879 /* We don't have to worry about changing the address since the
2880 size in bytes is supposed to be the same. */
2881 if (reload_in_progress)
2883 /* Copy the MEM to change the mode and move any
2884 substitutions from the old MEM to the new one. */
2885 ret = adjust_address_nv (x, new_mode, 0);
2886 copy_replacements (x, ret);
2889 ret = adjust_address (x, new_mode, 0);
2893 /* Note that we do want simplify_subreg's behavior of validating
2894 that the new mode is ok for a hard register. If we were to use
2895 simplify_gen_subreg, we would create the subreg, but would
2896 probably run into the target not being able to implement it. */
2897 /* Except, of course, when FORCE is true, when this is exactly what
2898 we want. Which is needed for CCmodes on some targets. */
2900 ret = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0);
2902 ret = simplify_subreg (new_mode, x, old_mode, 0);
2908 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X using
2909 an integer mode of the same size as MODE. Returns the instruction
2910 emitted, or NULL if such a move could not be generated. */
2913 emit_move_via_integer (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y, bool force)
2915 enum machine_mode imode;
2916 enum insn_code code;
2918 /* There must exist a mode of the exact size we require. */
2919 imode = int_mode_for_mode (mode);
2920 if (imode == BLKmode)
2923 /* The target must support moves in this mode. */
2924 code = optab_handler (mov_optab, imode)->insn_code;
2925 if (code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
2928 x = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, x, force);
2931 y = emit_move_change_mode (imode, mode, y, force);
2934 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
2937 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. X is a push_operand in MODE.
2938 Return an equivalent MEM that does not use an auto-increment. */
2941 emit_move_resolve_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x)
2943 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0));
2944 HOST_WIDE_INT adjust;
2947 adjust = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
2948 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
2949 adjust = PUSH_ROUNDING (adjust);
2951 if (code == PRE_DEC || code == POST_DEC)
2953 else if (code == PRE_MODIFY || code == POST_MODIFY)
2955 rtx expr = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
2958 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (expr) == PLUS || GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS);
2959 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (XEXP (expr, 1)) == CONST_INT);
2960 val = INTVAL (XEXP (expr, 1));
2961 if (GET_CODE (expr) == MINUS)
2963 gcc_assert (adjust == val || adjust == -val);
2967 /* Do not use anti_adjust_stack, since we don't want to update
2968 stack_pointer_delta. */
2969 temp = expand_simple_binop (Pmode, PLUS, stack_pointer_rtx,
2970 GEN_INT (adjust), stack_pointer_rtx,
2971 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
2972 if (temp != stack_pointer_rtx)
2973 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx, temp);
2980 temp = stack_pointer_rtx;
2985 temp = plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx, -adjust);
2991 return replace_equiv_address (x, temp);
2994 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Generate a move from Y into X.
2995 X is known to satisfy push_operand, and MODE is known to be complex.
2996 Returns the last instruction emitted. */
2999 emit_move_complex_push (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3001 enum machine_mode submode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
3004 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3005 unsigned int submodesize = GET_MODE_SIZE (submode);
3007 /* In case we output to the stack, but the size is smaller than the
3008 machine can push exactly, we need to use move instructions. */
3009 if (PUSH_ROUNDING (submodesize) != submodesize)
3011 x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x);
3012 return emit_move_insn (x, y);
3016 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
3017 regardless of machine's endianness. */
3018 switch (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
3032 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3033 read_complex_part (y, imag_first));
3034 return emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (submode, XEXP (x, 0)),
3035 read_complex_part (y, !imag_first));
3038 /* A subroutine of emit_move_complex. Perform the move from Y to X
3039 via two moves of the parts. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3042 emit_move_complex_parts (rtx x, rtx y)
3044 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3045 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3046 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values. */
3047 if (!reload_completed && !reload_in_progress
3048 && REG_P (x) && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, y))
3049 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3051 write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, false), false);
3052 write_complex_part (x, read_complex_part (y, true), true);
3054 return get_last_insn ();
3057 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3058 MODE is known to be complex. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3061 emit_move_complex (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3065 /* Need to take special care for pushes, to maintain proper ordering
3066 of the data, and possibly extra padding. */
3067 if (push_operand (x, mode))
3068 return emit_move_complex_push (mode, x, y);
3070 /* See if we can coerce the target into moving both values at once. */
3072 /* Move floating point as parts. */
3073 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
3074 && optab_handler (mov_optab, GET_MODE_INNER (mode))->insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3076 /* Not possible if the values are inherently not adjacent. */
3077 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONCAT || GET_CODE (y) == CONCAT)
3079 /* Is possible if both are registers (or subregs of registers). */
3080 else if (register_operand (x, mode) && register_operand (y, mode))
3082 /* If one of the operands is a memory, and alignment constraints
3083 are friendly enough, we may be able to do combined memory operations.
3084 We do not attempt this if Y is a constant because that combination is
3085 usually better with the by-parts thing below. */
3086 else if ((MEM_P (x) ? !CONSTANT_P (y) : MEM_P (y))
3087 && (!STRICT_ALIGNMENT
3088 || get_mode_alignment (mode) == BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT))
3097 /* For memory to memory moves, optimal behavior can be had with the
3098 existing block move logic. */
3099 if (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (y))
3101 emit_block_move (x, y, GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)),
3102 BLOCK_OP_NO_LIBCALL);
3103 return get_last_insn ();
3106 ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true);
3111 return emit_move_complex_parts (x, y);
3114 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3115 MODE is known to be MODE_CC. Returns the last instruction emitted. */
3118 emit_move_ccmode (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3122 /* Assume all MODE_CC modes are equivalent; if we have movcc, use it. */
3125 enum insn_code code = optab_handler (mov_optab, CCmode)->insn_code;
3126 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3128 x = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, x, true);
3129 y = emit_move_change_mode (CCmode, mode, y, true);
3130 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
3134 /* Otherwise, find the MODE_INT mode of the same width. */
3135 ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false);
3136 gcc_assert (ret != NULL);
3140 /* Return true if word I of OP lies entirely in the
3141 undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3144 undefined_operand_subword_p (rtx op, int i)
3146 enum machine_mode innermode, innermostmode;
3148 if (GET_CODE (op) != SUBREG)
3150 innermode = GET_MODE (op);
3151 innermostmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op));
3152 offset = i * UNITS_PER_WORD + SUBREG_BYTE (op);
3153 /* The SUBREG_BYTE represents offset, as if the value were stored in
3154 memory, except for a paradoxical subreg where we define
3155 SUBREG_BYTE to be 0; undo this exception as in
3157 if (SUBREG_BYTE (op) == 0
3158 && GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode))
3160 int difference = (GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (innermode));
3161 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
3162 offset += (difference / UNITS_PER_WORD) * UNITS_PER_WORD;
3163 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
3164 offset += difference % UNITS_PER_WORD;
3166 if (offset >= GET_MODE_SIZE (innermostmode)
3167 || offset <= -GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode))
3172 /* A subroutine of emit_move_insn_1. Generate a move from Y into X.
3173 MODE is any multi-word or full-word mode that lacks a move_insn
3174 pattern. Note that you will get better code if you define such
3175 patterns, even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
3178 emit_move_multi_word (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, rtx y)
3185 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD);
3187 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
3188 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
3189 if (push_operand (x, mode))
3190 x = emit_move_resolve_push (mode, x);
3192 /* If we are in reload, see if either operand is a MEM whose address
3193 is scheduled for replacement. */
3194 if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (x)
3195 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (x, 0))) != XEXP (x, 0))
3196 x = replace_equiv_address_nv (x, inner);
3197 if (reload_in_progress && MEM_P (y)
3198 && (inner = find_replacement (&XEXP (y, 0))) != XEXP (y, 0))
3199 y = replace_equiv_address_nv (y, inner);
3203 need_clobber = false;
3205 i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3208 rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode);
3211 /* Do not generate code for a move if it would come entirely
3212 from the undefined bits of a paradoxical subreg. */
3213 if (undefined_operand_subword_p (y, i))
3216 ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3218 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
3219 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. Then we must
3220 be able to get a part of Y. */
3221 if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y))
3223 y = use_anchored_address (force_const_mem (mode, y));
3224 ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
3226 else if (ypart == 0)
3227 ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode);
3229 gcc_assert (xpart && ypart);
3231 need_clobber |= (GET_CODE (xpart) == SUBREG);
3233 last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart);
3239 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
3240 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
3241 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
3242 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
3244 && ! (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3245 && need_clobber != 0)
3246 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, x));
3253 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
3254 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
3255 are basically valid. */
3258 emit_move_insn_1 (rtx x, rtx y)
3260 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3261 enum insn_code code;
3263 gcc_assert ((unsigned int) mode < (unsigned int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE);
3265 code = optab_handler (mov_optab, mode)->insn_code;
3266 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3267 return emit_insn (GEN_FCN (code) (x, y));
3269 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part. */
3270 if (COMPLEX_MODE_P (mode))
3271 return emit_move_complex (mode, x, y);
3273 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_DECIMAL_FLOAT)
3275 rtx result = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, true);
3277 /* If we can't find an integer mode, use multi words. */
3281 return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y);
3284 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
3285 return emit_move_ccmode (mode, x, y);
3287 /* Try using a move pattern for the corresponding integer mode. This is
3288 only safe when simplify_subreg can convert MODE constants into integer
3289 constants. At present, it can only do this reliably if the value
3290 fits within a HOST_WIDE_INT. */
3291 if (!CONSTANT_P (y) || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3293 rtx ret = emit_move_via_integer (mode, x, y, false);
3298 return emit_move_multi_word (mode, x, y);
3301 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
3302 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
3303 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
3304 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
3306 Return the last instruction emitted. */
3309 emit_move_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
3311 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3312 rtx y_cst = NULL_RTX;
3315 gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode
3316 && (GET_MODE (y) == mode || GET_MODE (y) == VOIDmode));
3321 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
3322 && (last_insn = compress_float_constant (x, y)))
3327 if (!LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
3329 y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
3331 /* If the target's cannot_force_const_mem prevented the spill,
3332 assume that the target's move expanders will also take care
3333 of the non-legitimate constant. */
3337 y = use_anchored_address (y);
3341 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
3344 && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))
3345 && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
3347 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))))
3348 x = validize_mem (x);
3351 && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0))
3353 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0)))))
3354 y = validize_mem (y);
3356 gcc_assert (mode != BLKmode);
3358 last_insn = emit_move_insn_1 (x, y);
3360 if (y_cst && REG_P (x)
3361 && (set = single_set (last_insn)) != NULL_RTX
3362 && SET_DEST (set) == x
3363 && ! rtx_equal_p (y_cst, SET_SRC (set)))
3364 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y_cst);
3369 /* If Y is representable exactly in a narrower mode, and the target can
3370 perform the extension directly from constant or memory, then emit the
3371 move as an extension. */
3374 compress_float_constant (rtx x, rtx y)
3376 enum machine_mode dstmode = GET_MODE (x);
3377 enum machine_mode orig_srcmode = GET_MODE (y);
3378 enum machine_mode srcmode;
3380 int oldcost, newcost;
3382 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, y);
3384 if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
3385 oldcost = rtx_cost (y, SET);
3387 oldcost = rtx_cost (force_const_mem (dstmode, y), SET);
3389 for (srcmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (GET_MODE_CLASS (orig_srcmode));
3390 srcmode != orig_srcmode;
3391 srcmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (srcmode))
3394 rtx trunc_y, last_insn;
3396 /* Skip if the target can't extend this way. */
3397 ic = can_extend_p (dstmode, srcmode, 0);
3398 if (ic == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3401 /* Skip if the narrowed value isn't exact. */
3402 if (! exact_real_truncate (srcmode, &r))
3405 trunc_y = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (r, srcmode);
3407 if (LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (trunc_y))
3409 /* Skip if the target needs extra instructions to perform
3411 if (! (*insn_data[ic].operand[1].predicate) (trunc_y, srcmode))
3413 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3414 newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET);
3415 if (oldcost < newcost)
3418 else if (float_extend_from_mem[dstmode][srcmode])
3420 trunc_y = force_const_mem (srcmode, trunc_y);
3421 /* This is valid, but may not be cheaper than the original. */
3422 newcost = rtx_cost (gen_rtx_FLOAT_EXTEND (dstmode, trunc_y), SET);
3423 if (oldcost < newcost)
3425 trunc_y = validize_mem (trunc_y);
3430 /* For CSE's benefit, force the compressed constant pool entry
3431 into a new pseudo. This constant may be used in different modes,
3432 and if not, combine will put things back together for us. */
3433 trunc_y = force_reg (srcmode, trunc_y);
3434 emit_unop_insn (ic, x, trunc_y, UNKNOWN);
3435 last_insn = get_last_insn ();
3438 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, y);
3446 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
3448 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
3449 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
3450 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
3452 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
3453 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
3454 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
3457 push_block (rtx size, int extra, int below)
3461 size = convert_modes (Pmode, ptr_mode, size, 1);
3462 if (CONSTANT_P (size))
3463 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra));
3464 else if (REG_P (size) && extra == 0)
3465 anti_adjust_stack (size);
3468 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size);
3470 temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab, temp, GEN_INT (extra),
3471 temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3472 anti_adjust_stack (temp);
3475 #ifndef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3481 temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx;
3482 if (extra != 0 && below)
3483 temp = plus_constant (temp, extra);
3487 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3488 temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3489 -INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra));
3490 else if (extra != 0 && !below)
3491 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3492 negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra)));
3494 temp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
3495 negate_rtx (Pmode, size));
3498 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp);
3501 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3503 /* Emit single push insn. */
3506 emit_single_push_insn (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x, tree type)
3509 unsigned rounded_size = PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3511 enum insn_code icode;
3512 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred;
3514 stack_pointer_delta += PUSH_ROUNDING (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3515 /* If there is push pattern, use it. Otherwise try old way of throwing
3516 MEM representing push operation to move expander. */
3517 icode = optab_handler (push_optab, mode)->insn_code;
3518 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3520 if (((pred = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].predicate)
3521 && !((*pred) (x, mode))))
3522 x = force_reg (mode, x);
3523 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (x));
3526 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == rounded_size)
3527 dest_addr = gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
3528 /* If we are to pad downward, adjust the stack pointer first and
3529 then store X into the stack location using an offset. This is
3530 because emit_move_insn does not know how to pad; it does not have
3532 else if (FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type) == downward)
3534 unsigned padding_size = rounded_size - GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
3535 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
3537 emit_move_insn (stack_pointer_rtx,
3538 expand_binop (Pmode,
3539 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3545 GEN_INT (rounded_size),
3546 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN));
3548 offset = (HOST_WIDE_INT) padding_size;
3549 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3550 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
3551 /* We have already decremented the stack pointer, so get the
3553 offset += (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size;
3555 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC)
3556 /* We have already incremented the stack pointer, so get the
3558 offset -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size;
3560 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, GEN_INT (offset));
3564 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3565 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC. */
3566 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3567 GEN_INT (-(HOST_WIDE_INT) rounded_size));
3569 /* ??? This seems wrong if STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC. */
3570 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx,
3571 GEN_INT (rounded_size));
3573 dest_addr = gen_rtx_PRE_MODIFY (Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx, dest_addr);
3576 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, dest_addr);
3580 set_mem_attributes (dest, type, 1);
3582 if (flag_optimize_sibling_calls)
3583 /* Function incoming arguments may overlap with sibling call
3584 outgoing arguments and we cannot allow reordering of reads
3585 from function arguments with stores to outgoing arguments
3586 of sibling calls. */
3587 set_mem_alias_set (dest, 0);
3589 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
3593 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
3595 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
3597 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
3598 needed only if X is BLKmode.
3600 ALIGN (in bits) is maximum alignment we can assume.
3602 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
3603 bytes of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
3604 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL bytes.
3605 REG must be a hard register in this case.
3606 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
3607 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
3610 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
3611 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
3613 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
3614 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
3615 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
3616 argument block has not been preallocated.
3618 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
3620 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
3621 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
3622 of bytes required. */
3625 emit_push_insn (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, tree type, rtx size,
3626 unsigned int align, int partial, rtx reg, int extra,
3627 rtx args_addr, rtx args_so_far, int reg_parm_stack_space,
3631 enum direction stack_direction
3632 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
3638 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
3639 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
3640 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
3641 enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
3643 /* Invert direction if stack is post-decrement.
3645 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
3646 if (where_pad != none)
3647 where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward);
3652 || (STRICT_ALIGNMENT && align < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)))
3654 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
3661 offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3662 used = partial - offset;
3664 if (mode != BLKmode)
3666 /* A value is to be stored in an insufficiently aligned
3667 stack slot; copy via a suitably aligned slot if
3669 size = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
3670 if (!MEM_P (xinner))
3672 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
3673 emit_move_insn (temp, xinner);
3680 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
3681 because registers will take care of them. */
3684 xinner = adjust_address (xinner, BLKmode, used);
3686 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3687 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3688 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3689 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3690 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : used;
3692 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3693 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
3694 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
3695 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
3698 && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
3700 && MEM_ALIGN (xinner) >= align
3701 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align))
3702 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
3703 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
3704 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
3705 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode, align))
3706 || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
3707 || (PUSH_ROUNDING (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)
3708 == (align / BITS_PER_UNIT)))
3709 && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size))
3711 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3712 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3713 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3714 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3715 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3716 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3718 move_by_pieces (NULL, xinner, INTVAL (size) - used, align, 0);
3721 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
3725 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
3726 to the address of that space. */
3728 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
3731 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
3732 size = GEN_INT (INTVAL (size) - used);
3734 size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size,
3735 GEN_INT (used), NULL_RTX, 0,
3739 /* Get the address of the stack space.
3740 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
3741 A single stack adjust will do. */
3744 temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward);
3747 else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
3748 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3749 plus_constant (args_addr,
3750 skip + INTVAL (args_so_far)));
3752 temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
3753 plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3758 if (!ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS)
3760 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
3761 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
3762 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
3764 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp)
3765 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp))
3766 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
3769 target = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, temp);
3771 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
3772 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
3773 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
3774 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
3775 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
3776 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3777 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3778 set_mem_align (target, align);
3780 emit_block_move (target, xinner, size, BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM);
3783 else if (partial > 0)
3785 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
3787 int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3790 /* # bytes of start of argument
3791 that we must make space for but need not store. */
3792 int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3793 int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far);
3796 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3797 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3798 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3799 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3800 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3801 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3803 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
3804 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
3805 and leave the space uninitialized. */
3809 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
3810 allocate on the stack. Convert OFFSET to words too. */
3811 not_stack = (partial - offset) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
3812 offset /= UNITS_PER_WORD;
3814 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3815 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3816 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3817 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3818 skip = (reg_parm_stack_space == 0) ? 0 : not_stack;
3820 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
3821 x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
3823 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
3824 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
3825 if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3826 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT))
3827 x = copy_to_reg (x);
3829 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
3830 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
3831 has a size a multiple of a word. */
3832 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3833 for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++)
3835 for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--)
3837 if (i >= not_stack + offset)
3838 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode),
3839 word_mode, NULL_TREE, NULL_RTX, align, 0, NULL_RTX,
3841 GEN_INT (args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip)
3843 reg_parm_stack_space, alignment_pad);
3850 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3851 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3852 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3853 if (extra && args_addr == 0
3854 && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
3855 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3857 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3858 if (args_addr == 0 && PUSH_ARGS)
3859 emit_single_push_insn (mode, x, type);
3863 if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
3865 = memory_address (mode,
3866 plus_constant (args_addr,
3867 INTVAL (args_so_far)));
3869 addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, args_addr,
3871 dest = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, addr);
3873 /* We do *not* set_mem_attributes here, because incoming arguments
3874 may overlap with sibling call outgoing arguments and we cannot
3875 allow reordering of reads from function arguments with stores
3876 to outgoing arguments of sibling calls. We do, however, want
3877 to record the alignment of the stack slot. */
3878 /* ALIGN may well be better aligned than TYPE, e.g. due to
3879 PARM_BOUNDARY. Assume the caller isn't lying. */
3880 set_mem_align (dest, align);
3882 emit_move_insn (dest, x);
3886 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
3887 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
3888 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
3889 if (partial > 0 && reg != 0)
3891 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
3892 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
3893 if (GET_CODE (reg) == PARALLEL)
3894 emit_group_load (reg, x, type, -1);
3897 gcc_assert (partial % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0);
3898 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial / UNITS_PER_WORD, mode);
3902 if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction)
3903 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra));
3905 if (alignment_pad && args_addr == 0)
3906 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad);
3909 /* Return X if X can be used as a subtarget in a sequence of arithmetic
3913 get_subtarget (rtx x)
3917 /* Only registers can be subtargets. */
3919 /* Don't use hard regs to avoid extending their life. */
3920 || REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3924 /* A subroutine of expand_assignment. Optimize FIELD op= VAL, where
3925 FIELD is a bitfield. Returns true if the optimization was successful,
3926 and there's nothing else to do. */
3929 optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize,
3930 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
3931 enum machine_mode mode1, rtx str_rtx,
3934 enum machine_mode str_mode = GET_MODE (str_rtx);
3935 unsigned int str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode);
3940 if (mode1 != VOIDmode
3941 || bitsize >= BITS_PER_WORD
3942 || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD
3943 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (to)
3944 || TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (to))
3948 if (!BINARY_CLASS_P (src)
3949 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (src)) != INTEGER_TYPE)
3952 op0 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 0);
3953 op1 = TREE_OPERAND (src, 1);
3956 if (!operand_equal_p (to, op0, 0))
3959 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
3961 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset1;
3963 if (str_bitsize == 0 || str_bitsize > BITS_PER_WORD)
3964 str_mode = word_mode;
3965 str_mode = get_best_mode (bitsize, bitpos,
3966 MEM_ALIGN (str_rtx), str_mode, 0);
3967 if (str_mode == VOIDmode)
3969 str_bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (str_mode);
3972 bitpos %= str_bitsize;
3973 offset1 = (offset1 - bitpos) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
3974 str_rtx = adjust_address (str_rtx, str_mode, offset1);
3976 else if (!REG_P (str_rtx) && GET_CODE (str_rtx) != SUBREG)
3979 /* If the bit field covers the whole REG/MEM, store_field
3980 will likely generate better code. */
3981 if (bitsize >= str_bitsize)
3984 /* We can't handle fields split across multiple entities. */
3985 if (bitpos + bitsize > str_bitsize)
3988 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
3989 bitpos = str_bitsize - bitpos - bitsize;
3991 switch (TREE_CODE (src))
3995 /* For now, just optimize the case of the topmost bitfield
3996 where we don't need to do any masking and also
3997 1 bit bitfields where xor can be used.
3998 We might win by one instruction for the other bitfields
3999 too if insv/extv instructions aren't used, so that
4000 can be added later. */
4001 if (bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize
4002 && (bitsize != 1 || TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST))
4005 value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, str_mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
4006 value = convert_modes (str_mode,
4007 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value,
4008 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1)));
4010 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4011 we can alias adjacent data. */
4012 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
4014 str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx);
4015 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0);
4016 set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0);
4019 binop = TREE_CODE (src) == PLUS_EXPR ? add_optab : sub_optab;
4020 if (bitsize == 1 && bitpos + bitsize != str_bitsize)
4022 value = expand_and (str_mode, value, const1_rtx, NULL);
4025 value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, str_mode, value,
4026 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos),
4028 result = expand_binop (str_mode, binop, str_rtx,
4029 value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN);
4030 if (result != str_rtx)
4031 emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result);
4036 if (TREE_CODE (op1) != INTEGER_CST)
4038 value = expand_expr (op1, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (str_rtx), EXPAND_NORMAL);
4039 value = convert_modes (GET_MODE (str_rtx),
4040 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op1)), value,
4041 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op1)));
4043 /* We may be accessing data outside the field, which means
4044 we can alias adjacent data. */
4045 if (MEM_P (str_rtx))
4047 str_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (str_rtx);
4048 set_mem_alias_set (str_rtx, 0);
4049 set_mem_expr (str_rtx, 0);
4052 binop = TREE_CODE (src) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab : xor_optab;
4053 if (bitpos + bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (str_rtx)))
4055 rtx mask = GEN_INT (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize)
4057 value = expand_and (GET_MODE (str_rtx), value, mask,
4060 value = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (str_rtx), value,
4061 build_int_cst (NULL_TREE, bitpos),
4063 result = expand_binop (GET_MODE (str_rtx), binop, str_rtx,
4064 value, str_rtx, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN);
4065 if (result != str_rtx)
4066 emit_move_insn (str_rtx, result);
4077 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO. If NONTEMPORAL
4078 is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
4081 expand_assignment (tree to, tree from, bool nontemporal)
4086 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
4087 if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK)
4089 result = expand_normal (from);
4093 /* Optimize away no-op moves without side-effects. */
4094 if (operand_equal_p (to, from, 0))
4097 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
4098 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
4099 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
4100 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
4102 if (handled_component_p (to)
4103 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to)) == ARRAY_TYPE)
4105 enum machine_mode mode1;
4106 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
4113 tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset, &mode1,
4114 &unsignedp, &volatilep, true);
4116 /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
4117 make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */
4119 to_rtx = expand_normal (tem);
4125 if (!MEM_P (to_rtx))
4127 /* We can get constant negative offsets into arrays with broken
4128 user code. Translate this to a trap instead of ICEing. */
4129 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (offset) == INTEGER_CST);
4130 expand_builtin_trap ();
4131 to_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, const0_rtx);
4134 offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
4135 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4136 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
4137 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
4139 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
4140 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
4143 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
4144 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
4146 && GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode
4147 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx, 0)) != VOIDmode
4149 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
4150 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
4151 && MEM_ALIGN (to_rtx) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
4153 to_rtx = adjust_address (to_rtx, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4157 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
4158 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (to,
4162 /* Handle expand_expr of a complex value returning a CONCAT. */
4163 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == CONCAT)
4165 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (from)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4167 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0);
4168 result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, false, nontemporal);
4172 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0 || bitpos == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode1));
4173 result = store_expr (from, XEXP (to_rtx, bitpos != 0), false,
4181 /* If the field is at offset zero, we could have been given the
4182 DECL_RTX of the parent struct. Don't munge it. */
4183 to_rtx = shallow_copy_rtx (to_rtx);
4185 set_mem_attributes_minus_bitpos (to_rtx, to, 0, bitpos);
4187 /* Deal with volatile and readonly fields. The former is only
4188 done for MEM. Also set MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P if needed. */
4190 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4191 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (to))
4192 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
4195 if (optimize_bitfield_assignment_op (bitsize, bitpos, mode1,
4199 result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from,
4200 TREE_TYPE (tem), get_alias_set (to),
4205 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4211 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
4212 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
4213 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
4214 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
4215 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
4217 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL or PARM_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG
4218 since it might be a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension
4219 needs to be done. Handling this in the normal way is safe because no
4220 computation is done before the call. */
4221 if (TREE_CODE (from) == CALL_EXPR && ! aggregate_value_p (from, from)
4222 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from))) == INTEGER_CST
4223 && ! ((TREE_CODE (to) == VAR_DECL || TREE_CODE (to) == PARM_DECL)
4224 && REG_P (DECL_RTL (to))))
4229 value = expand_normal (from);
4231 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4233 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4234 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4235 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4236 emit_group_load (to_rtx, value, TREE_TYPE (from),
4237 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4238 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx) == BLKmode)
4239 emit_block_move (to_rtx, value, expr_size (from), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
4242 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (to)))
4243 value = convert_memory_address (GET_MODE (to_rtx), value);
4244 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, value);
4246 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4252 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
4253 Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */
4256 to_rtx = expand_expr (to, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_WRITE);
4258 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
4259 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL
4260 && (REG_P (to_rtx) || GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL))
4265 temp = expand_expr (from, NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (to_rtx), EXPAND_NORMAL);
4267 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == PARALLEL)
4268 emit_group_load (to_rtx, temp, TREE_TYPE (from),
4269 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from)));
4271 emit_move_insn (to_rtx, temp);
4273 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4279 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
4280 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
4281 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
4282 if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF
4283 && current_function_returns_struct
4284 && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct)
4289 size = expr_size (from);
4290 from_rtx = expand_normal (from);
4292 emit_library_call (memmove_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL,
4293 VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4294 XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
4295 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype),
4296 size, TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype)),
4297 TYPE_MODE (sizetype));
4299 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
4305 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
4308 result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, 0, nontemporal);
4309 preserve_temp_slots (result);
4315 /* Emits nontemporal store insn that moves FROM to TO. Returns true if this
4316 succeeded, false otherwise. */
4319 emit_storent_insn (rtx to, rtx from)
4321 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (to), imode;
4322 enum insn_code code = optab_handler (storent_optab, mode)->insn_code;
4325 if (code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4328 imode = insn_data[code].operand[0].mode;
4329 if (!insn_data[code].operand[0].predicate (to, imode))
4332 imode = insn_data[code].operand[1].mode;
4333 if (!insn_data[code].operand[1].predicate (from, imode))
4335 from = copy_to_mode_reg (imode, from);
4336 if (!insn_data[code].operand[1].predicate (from, imode))
4340 pattern = GEN_FCN (code) (to, from);
4341 if (pattern == NULL_RTX)
4344 emit_insn (pattern);
4348 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
4349 and storing the value into TARGET.
4351 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
4352 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
4353 because C has no operators that could combine two different
4354 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
4355 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
4358 If CALL_PARAM_P is nonzero, this is a store into a call param on the
4359 stack, and block moves may need to be treated specially.
4361 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try using a nontemporal store instruction. */
4364 store_expr (tree exp, rtx target, int call_param_p, bool nontemporal)
4367 rtx alt_rtl = NULL_RTX;
4368 int dont_return_target = 0;
4370 if (VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4372 /* C++ can generate ?: expressions with a throw expression in one
4373 branch and an rvalue in the other. Here, we resolve attempts to
4374 store the throw expression's nonexistent result. */
4375 gcc_assert (!call_param_p);
4376 expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
4379 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR)
4381 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
4383 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
4384 call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4385 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p,
4388 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
4390 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
4391 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
4392 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
4393 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
4395 rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
4397 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4399 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1);
4400 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, call_param_p,
4402 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2));
4405 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, call_param_p,
4412 else if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target))
4413 /* If this is a scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
4414 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
4415 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
4418 rtx inner_target = 0;
4420 /* We can do the conversion inside EXP, which will often result
4421 in some optimizations. Do the conversion in two steps: first
4422 change the signedness, if needed, then the extend. But don't
4423 do this if the type of EXP is a subtype of something else
4424 since then the conversion might involve more than just
4425 converting modes. */
4426 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4427 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == 0
4428 && (!lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations
4429 || (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (target))
4430 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))))
4432 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp))
4433 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target))
4435 /* Some types, e.g. Fortran's logical*4, won't have a signed
4436 version, so use the mode instead. */
4438 = (signed_or_unsigned_type_for
4439 (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target), TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4441 ntype = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode
4442 (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4443 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4445 exp = fold_convert (ntype, exp);
4448 exp = fold_convert (lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode
4449 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4450 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target)),
4453 inner_target = SUBREG_REG (target);
4456 temp = expand_expr (exp, inner_target, VOIDmode,
4457 call_param_p ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL);
4459 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
4460 sure that we properly convert it. */
4461 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode)
4463 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4464 temp, SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4465 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target)),
4466 GET_MODE (target), temp,
4467 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4470 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target), temp,
4471 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target));
4479 /* If we want to use a nontemporal store, force the value to
4481 tmp_target = nontemporal ? NULL_RTX : target;
4482 temp = expand_expr_real (exp, tmp_target, GET_MODE (target),
4484 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL),
4486 /* Return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
4487 If TARGET is a volatile mem ref, either return TARGET
4488 or return a reg copied *from* TARGET; ANSI requires this.
4490 Otherwise, if TEMP is not TARGET, return TEMP
4491 if it is constant (for efficiency),
4492 or if we really want the correct value. */
4493 if (!(target && REG_P (target)
4494 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4495 && !(MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
4496 && ! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4497 && CONSTANT_P (temp))
4498 dont_return_target = 1;
4501 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
4502 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
4503 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
4505 if (CONSTANT_P (temp) && GET_MODE (temp) == VOIDmode
4506 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4507 && GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
4508 temp = convert_modes (GET_MODE (target), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
4509 temp, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4511 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
4512 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if necessary and emit the
4513 pending incrementations that have been queued when expanding EXP.
4514 Note that we cannot emit the whole queue blindly because this will
4515 effectively disable the POST_INC optimization later.
4517 If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
4518 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
4520 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
4521 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
4523 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
4524 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
4525 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
4526 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
4527 of volatile memory references. */
4529 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp, target)
4530 || (temp != target && (side_effects_p (temp)
4531 || side_effects_p (target))))
4532 && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK
4533 /* If store_expr stores a DECL whose DECL_RTL(exp) == TARGET,
4534 but TARGET is not valid memory reference, TEMP will differ
4535 from TARGET although it is really the same location. */
4536 && !(alt_rtl && rtx_equal_p (alt_rtl, target))
4537 /* If there's nothing to copy, don't bother. Don't call
4538 expr_size unless necessary, because some front-ends (C++)
4539 expr_size-hook must not be given objects that are not
4540 supposed to be bit-copied or bit-initialized. */
4541 && expr_size (exp) != const0_rtx)
4543 if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target)
4544 && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
4546 int unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
4547 if (dont_return_target)
4549 /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
4550 so make sure it has the proper mode.
4551 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET. */
4552 temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp);
4553 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4555 else if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
4556 emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
4558 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM
4559 : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4561 convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp);
4564 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST)
4566 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array. The string
4567 constant may be shorter than the array. So copy just the string's
4568 actual length, and clear the rest. First get the size of the data
4569 type of the string, which is actually the size of the target. */
4570 rtx size = expr_size (exp);
4572 if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
4573 && INTVAL (size) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp))
4574 emit_block_move (target, temp, size,
4576 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4579 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
4581 = size_binop (MIN_EXPR,
4582 make_tree (sizetype, size),
4583 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp)));
4585 = expand_expr (copy_size, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
4587 ? EXPAND_STACK_PARM : EXPAND_NORMAL));
4590 /* Copy that much. */
4591 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, copy_size_rtx,
4592 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4593 emit_block_move (target, temp, copy_size_rtx,
4595 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4597 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
4598 Do all calculations in ptr_mode. */
4599 if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx) == CONST_INT)
4601 size = plus_constant (size, -INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4602 target = adjust_address (target, BLKmode,
4603 INTVAL (copy_size_rtx));
4607 size = expand_binop (TYPE_MODE (sizetype), sub_optab, size,
4608 copy_size_rtx, NULL_RTX, 0,
4611 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4612 if (GET_MODE (copy_size_rtx) != Pmode)
4613 copy_size_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, copy_size_rtx,
4614 TYPE_UNSIGNED (sizetype));
4617 target = offset_address (target, copy_size_rtx,
4618 highest_pow2_factor (copy_size));
4619 label = gen_label_rtx ();
4620 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size, const0_rtx, LT, NULL_RTX,
4621 GET_MODE (size), 0, label);
4624 if (size != const0_rtx)
4625 clear_storage (target, size, BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
4631 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
4632 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
4633 else if (GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL)
4634 emit_group_load (target, temp, TREE_TYPE (exp),
4635 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
4636 else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
4637 emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
4639 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
4640 else if (nontemporal
4641 && emit_storent_insn (target, temp))
4642 /* If we managed to emit a nontemporal store, there is nothing else to
4647 temp = force_operand (temp, target);
4649 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4656 /* Helper for categorize_ctor_elements. Identical interface. */
4659 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (const_tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts,
4660 HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count,
4663 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
4664 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, elt_count;
4665 tree value, purpose;
4667 /* Whether CTOR is a valid constant initializer, in accordance with what
4668 initializer_constant_valid_p does. If inferred from the constructor
4669 elements, true until proven otherwise. */
4670 bool const_from_elts_p = constructor_static_from_elts_p (ctor);
4671 bool const_p = const_from_elts_p ? true : TREE_STATIC (ctor);
4676 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor), idx, purpose, value)
4681 if (TREE_CODE (purpose) == RANGE_EXPR)
4683 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 0);
4684 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (purpose, 1);
4686 if (host_integerp (lo_index, 1) && host_integerp (hi_index, 1))
4687 mult = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1)
4688 - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1);
4691 switch (TREE_CODE (value))
4695 HOST_WIDE_INT nz = 0, ic = 0;
4698 = categorize_ctor_elements_1 (value, &nz, &ic, p_must_clear);
4700 nz_elts += mult * nz;
4701 elt_count += mult * ic;
4703 if (const_from_elts_p && const_p)
4704 const_p = const_elt_p;
4710 if (!initializer_zerop (value))
4716 nz_elts += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value);
4717 elt_count += mult * TREE_STRING_LENGTH (value);
4721 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_REALPART (value)))
4723 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_IMAGPART (value)))
4731 for (v = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (value); v; v = TREE_CHAIN (v))
4733 if (!initializer_zerop (TREE_VALUE (v)))
4744 if (const_from_elts_p && const_p)
4745 const_p = initializer_constant_valid_p (value, TREE_TYPE (value))
4752 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == UNION_TYPE
4753 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE))
4756 bool clear_this = true;
4758 if (!VEC_empty (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor)))
4760 /* We don't expect more than one element of the union to be
4761 initialized. Not sure what we should do otherwise... */
4762 gcc_assert (VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor))
4765 init_sub_type = TREE_TYPE (VEC_index (constructor_elt,
4766 CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (ctor),
4769 /* ??? We could look at each element of the union, and find the
4770 largest element. Which would avoid comparing the size of the
4771 initialized element against any tail padding in the union.
4772 Doesn't seem worth the effort... */
4773 if (simple_cst_equal (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (ctor)),
4774 TYPE_SIZE (init_sub_type)) == 1)
4776 /* And now we have to find out if the element itself is fully
4777 constructed. E.g. for union { struct { int a, b; } s; } u
4778 = { .s = { .a = 1 } }. */
4779 if (elt_count == count_type_elements (init_sub_type, false))
4784 *p_must_clear = clear_this;
4787 *p_nz_elts += nz_elts;
4788 *p_elt_count += elt_count;
4793 /* Examine CTOR to discover:
4794 * how many scalar fields are set to nonzero values,
4795 and place it in *P_NZ_ELTS;
4796 * how many scalar fields in total are in CTOR,
4797 and place it in *P_ELT_COUNT.
4798 * if a type is a union, and the initializer from the constructor
4799 is not the largest element in the union, then set *p_must_clear.
4801 Return whether or not CTOR is a valid static constant initializer, the same
4802 as "initializer_constant_valid_p (CTOR, TREE_TYPE (CTOR)) != 0". */
4805 categorize_ctor_elements (const_tree ctor, HOST_WIDE_INT *p_nz_elts,
4806 HOST_WIDE_INT *p_elt_count,
4811 *p_must_clear = false;
4814 categorize_ctor_elements_1 (ctor, p_nz_elts, p_elt_count, p_must_clear);
4817 /* Count the number of scalars in TYPE. Return -1 on overflow or
4818 variable-sized. If ALLOW_FLEXARR is true, don't count flexible
4819 array member at the end of the structure. */
4822 count_type_elements (const_tree type, bool allow_flexarr)
4824 const HOST_WIDE_INT max = ~((HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT-1));
4825 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
4829 tree telts = array_type_nelts (type);
4830 if (telts && host_integerp (telts, 1))
4832 HOST_WIDE_INT n = tree_low_cst (telts, 1) + 1;
4833 HOST_WIDE_INT m = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (type), false);
4836 else if (max / n > m)
4844 HOST_WIDE_INT n = 0, t;
4847 for (f = TYPE_FIELDS (type); f ; f = TREE_CHAIN (f))
4848 if (TREE_CODE (f) == FIELD_DECL)
4850 t = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (f), false);
4853 /* Check for structures with flexible array member. */
4854 tree tf = TREE_TYPE (f);
4856 && TREE_CHAIN (f) == NULL
4857 && TREE_CODE (tf) == ARRAY_TYPE
4859 && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf))
4860 && integer_zerop (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf)))
4861 && !TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (tf))
4862 && int_size_in_bytes (type) >= 0)
4874 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
4876 /* Ho hum. How in the world do we guess here? Clearly it isn't
4877 right to count the fields. Guess based on the number of words. */
4878 HOST_WIDE_INT n = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4881 return n / UNITS_PER_WORD;
4888 return TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type);
4896 case REFERENCE_TYPE:
4908 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
4911 mostly_zeros_p (tree exp)
4913 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
4916 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count, elts;
4919 categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear);
4923 elts = count_type_elements (TREE_TYPE (exp), false);
4925 return nz_elts < elts / 4;
4928 return initializer_zerop (exp);
4931 /* Return 1 if EXP contains all zeros. */
4934 all_zeros_p (tree exp)
4936 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
4939 HOST_WIDE_INT nz_elts, count;
4942 categorize_ctor_elements (exp, &nz_elts, &count, &must_clear);
4943 return nz_elts == 0;
4946 return initializer_zerop (exp);
4949 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
4950 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
4951 TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type.
4952 CLEARED is as for store_constructor.
4953 ALIAS_SET is the alias set to use for any stores.
4955 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
4956 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
4957 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
4958 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
4961 store_constructor_field (rtx target, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize,
4962 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos, enum machine_mode mode,
4963 tree exp, tree type, int cleared, int alias_set)
4965 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR
4966 /* We can only call store_constructor recursively if the size and
4967 bit position are on a byte boundary. */
4968 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0
4969 && (bitsize > 0 && bitsize % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0)
4970 /* If we have a nonzero bitpos for a register target, then we just
4971 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
4972 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
4973 && (bitpos == 0 || MEM_P (target)))
4977 = adjust_address (target,
4978 GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode
4980 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target)))
4981 ? BLKmode : VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4984 /* Update the alias set, if required. */
4985 if (MEM_P (target) && ! MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
4986 && MEM_ALIAS_SET (target) != 0)
4988 target = copy_rtx (target);
4989 set_mem_alias_set (target, alias_set);
4992 store_constructor (exp, target, cleared, bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
4995 store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set, false);
4998 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
4999 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM; we know it cannot conflict, since
5000 safe_from_p has been called.
5001 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
5002 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
5003 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
5004 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
5007 store_constructor (tree exp, rtx target, int cleared, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
5009 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
5010 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5011 HOST_WIDE_INT exp_size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5014 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
5018 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
5020 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5023 /* If size is zero or the target is already cleared, do nothing. */
5024 if (size == 0 || cleared)
5026 /* We either clear the aggregate or indicate the value is dead. */
5027 else if ((TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE
5028 || TREE_CODE (type) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE)
5029 && ! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
5030 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
5032 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5036 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
5037 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
5038 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
5039 this probably loses. */
5040 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp)
5041 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
5043 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5047 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure or
5048 if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros, clear
5049 the whole structure first. Don't do this if TARGET is a
5050 register whose mode size isn't equal to SIZE since
5051 clear_storage can't handle this case. */
5053 && (((int)VEC_length (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
5054 != fields_length (type))
5055 || mostly_zeros_p (exp))
5057 || ((HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target))
5060 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5064 if (REG_P (target) && !cleared)
5065 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
5067 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5068 corresponding field of TARGET. */
5069 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, field, value)
5071 enum machine_mode mode;
5072 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5073 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = 0;
5075 rtx to_rtx = target;
5077 /* Just ignore missing fields. We cleared the whole
5078 structure, above, if any fields are missing. */
5082 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5085 if (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE (field), 1))
5086 bitsize = tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE (field), 1);
5090 mode = DECL_MODE (field);
5091 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
5094 offset = DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field);
5095 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
5096 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 0))
5098 bitpos = int_bit_position (field);
5102 bitpos = tree_low_cst (DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field), 0);
5109 = SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (offset,
5110 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp),
5113 offset_rtx = expand_normal (offset);
5114 gcc_assert (MEM_P (to_rtx));
5116 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
5117 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
5118 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
5120 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
5121 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
5124 to_rtx = offset_address (to_rtx, offset_rtx,
5125 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
5128 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
5129 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a
5130 word, at the start of a word, try to widen it to a full
5131 word. This special case allows us to output C++ member
5132 function initializations in a form that the optimizers
5135 && bitsize < BITS_PER_WORD
5136 && bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD == 0
5137 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5138 && TREE_CODE (value) == INTEGER_CST
5140 && bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD <= exp_size * BITS_PER_UNIT)
5142 tree type = TREE_TYPE (value);
5144 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) < BITS_PER_WORD)
5146 type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size
5147 (BITS_PER_WORD, TYPE_UNSIGNED (type));
5148 value = fold_convert (type, value);
5151 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
5153 = fold_build2 (LSHIFT_EXPR, type, value,
5154 build_int_cst (type,
5155 BITS_PER_WORD - bitsize));
5156 bitsize = BITS_PER_WORD;
5161 if (MEM_P (to_rtx) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx)
5162 && DECL_NONADDRESSABLE_P (field))
5164 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5165 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) = 1;
5168 store_constructor_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode,
5169 value, type, cleared,
5170 get_alias_set (TREE_TYPE (field)));
5177 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT i;
5180 tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type);
5182 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt = 0;
5183 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt = 0;
5185 domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (type);
5186 const_bounds_p = (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)
5187 && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain)
5188 && host_integerp (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0)
5189 && host_integerp (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0));
5191 /* If we have constant bounds for the range of the type, get them. */
5194 minelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain), 0);
5195 maxelt = tree_low_cst (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain), 0);
5198 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array, clear
5199 the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5200 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5203 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp))
5207 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5209 HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0;
5210 need_to_clear = ! const_bounds_p;
5212 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
5213 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index). It
5214 is also needed to check for missing elements. */
5215 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, index, value)
5217 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count;
5222 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5224 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5225 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5227 if (! host_integerp (lo_index, 1)
5228 || ! host_integerp (hi_index, 1))
5234 this_node_count = (tree_low_cst (hi_index, 1)
5235 - tree_low_cst (lo_index, 1) + 1);
5238 this_node_count = 1;
5240 count += this_node_count;
5241 if (mostly_zeros_p (value))
5242 zero_count += this_node_count;
5245 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing
5246 elements, or if the incidence of zero elements is >=
5249 && (count < maxelt - minelt + 1
5250 || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count))
5254 if (need_to_clear && size > 0)
5257 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5259 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5263 if (!cleared && REG_P (target))
5264 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5265 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, target));
5267 /* Store each element of the constructor into the
5268 corresponding element of TARGET, determined by counting the
5270 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i, index, value)
5272 enum machine_mode mode;
5273 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5274 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5276 rtx xtarget = target;
5278 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5281 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (elttype);
5282 mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
5283 if (mode == BLKmode)
5284 bitsize = (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5285 ? tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5288 bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5290 if (index != NULL_TREE && TREE_CODE (index) == RANGE_EXPR)
5292 tree lo_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 0);
5293 tree hi_index = TREE_OPERAND (index, 1);
5294 rtx index_r, pos_rtx;
5295 HOST_WIDE_INT lo, hi, count;
5298 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
5300 && host_integerp (lo_index, 0)
5301 && host_integerp (hi_index, 0)
5302 && (lo = tree_low_cst (lo_index, 0),
5303 hi = tree_low_cst (hi_index, 0),
5304 count = hi - lo + 1,
5307 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1)
5308 && (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1) * count
5311 lo -= minelt; hi -= minelt;
5312 for (; lo <= hi; lo++)
5314 bitpos = lo * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0);
5317 && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5318 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5319 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5321 target = copy_rtx (target);
5322 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5325 store_constructor_field
5326 (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value, type, cleared,
5327 get_alias_set (elttype));
5332 rtx loop_start = gen_label_rtx ();
5333 rtx loop_end = gen_label_rtx ();
5336 expand_normal (hi_index);
5337 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (domain);
5339 index = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL_TREE, domain);
5342 = gen_reg_rtx (promote_mode (domain, DECL_MODE (index),
5344 SET_DECL_RTL (index, index_r);
5345 store_expr (lo_index, index_r, 0, false);
5347 /* Build the head of the loop. */
5348 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5349 emit_label (loop_start);
5351 /* Assign value to element index. */
5353 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5354 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR,
5357 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)));
5360 size_binop (MULT_EXPR, position,
5361 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5362 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5364 pos_rtx = expand_normal (position);
5365 xtarget = offset_address (target, pos_rtx,
5366 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5367 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5368 if (TREE_CODE (value) == CONSTRUCTOR)
5369 store_constructor (value, xtarget, cleared,
5370 bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5372 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0, false);
5374 /* Generate a conditional jump to exit the loop. */
5375 exit_cond = build2 (LT_EXPR, integer_type_node,
5377 jumpif (exit_cond, loop_end);
5379 /* Update the loop counter, and jump to the head of
5381 expand_assignment (index,
5382 build2 (PLUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5383 index, integer_one_node),
5386 emit_jump (loop_start);
5388 /* Build the end of the loop. */
5389 emit_label (loop_end);
5392 else if ((index != 0 && ! host_integerp (index, 0))
5393 || ! host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1))
5398 index = ssize_int (1);
5401 index = fold_convert (ssizetype,
5402 fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR,
5405 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain)));
5408 size_binop (MULT_EXPR, index,
5409 fold_convert (ssizetype,
5410 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype)));
5411 xtarget = offset_address (target,
5412 expand_normal (position),
5413 highest_pow2_factor (position));
5414 xtarget = adjust_address (xtarget, mode, 0);
5415 store_expr (value, xtarget, 0, false);
5420 bitpos = ((tree_low_cst (index, 0) - minelt)
5421 * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5423 bitpos = (i * tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1));
5425 if (MEM_P (target) && !MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target)
5426 && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE
5427 && TYPE_NONALIASED_COMPONENT (type))
5429 target = copy_rtx (target);
5430 MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (target) = 1;
5432 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, value,
5433 type, cleared, get_alias_set (elttype));
5441 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
5442 constructor_elt *ce;
5446 tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (type);
5447 int elt_size = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 1);
5448 enum machine_mode eltmode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
5449 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize;
5450 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
5451 rtvec vector = NULL;
5454 gcc_assert (eltmode != BLKmode);
5456 n_elts = TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (type);
5457 if (REG_P (target) && VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (target)))
5459 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (target);
5461 icode = (int) optab_handler (vec_init_optab, mode)->insn_code;
5462 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5466 vector = rtvec_alloc (n_elts);
5467 for (i = 0; i < n_elts; i++)
5468 RTVEC_ELT (vector, i) = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE_INNER (mode));
5472 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the vector,
5473 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is static
5474 constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
5477 else if (REG_P (target) && TREE_STATIC (exp))
5481 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT count = 0, zero_count = 0;
5484 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value)
5486 int n_elts_here = tree_low_cst
5487 (int_const_binop (TRUNC_DIV_EXPR,
5488 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)),
5489 TYPE_SIZE (elttype), 0), 1);
5491 count += n_elts_here;
5492 if (mostly_zeros_p (value))
5493 zero_count += n_elts_here;
5496 /* Clear the entire vector first if there are any missing elements,
5497 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
5498 need_to_clear = (count < n_elts || 4 * zero_count >= 3 * count);
5501 if (need_to_clear && size > 0 && !vector)
5504 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5506 clear_storage (target, GEN_INT (size), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5510 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
5511 if (!cleared && !vector && REG_P (target))
5512 emit_move_insn (target, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target)));
5514 /* Store each element of the constructor into the corresponding
5515 element of TARGET, determined by counting the elements. */
5516 for (idx = 0, i = 0;
5517 VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce);
5518 idx++, i += bitsize / elt_size)
5520 HOST_WIDE_INT eltpos;
5521 tree value = ce->value;
5523 bitsize = tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (value)), 1);
5524 if (cleared && initializer_zerop (value))
5528 eltpos = tree_low_cst (ce->index, 1);
5534 /* Vector CONSTRUCTORs should only be built from smaller
5535 vectors in the case of BLKmode vectors. */
5536 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) != VECTOR_TYPE);
5537 RTVEC_ELT (vector, eltpos)
5538 = expand_normal (value);
5542 enum machine_mode value_mode =
5543 TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (value)) == VECTOR_TYPE
5544 ? TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (value))
5546 bitpos = eltpos * elt_size;
5547 store_constructor_field (target, bitsize, bitpos,
5548 value_mode, value, type,
5549 cleared, get_alias_set (elttype));
5554 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode)
5556 gen_rtx_PARALLEL (GET_MODE (target), vector)));
5565 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
5566 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
5567 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
5568 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
5570 Always return const0_rtx unless we have something particular to
5573 TYPE is the type of the underlying object,
5575 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
5576 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
5577 reference to the containing structure.
5579 If NONTEMPORAL is true, try generating a nontemporal store. */
5582 store_field (rtx target, HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
5583 enum machine_mode mode, tree exp, tree type, int alias_set,
5586 HOST_WIDE_INT width_mask = 0;
5588 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
5591 /* If we have nothing to store, do nothing unless the expression has
5594 return expand_expr (exp, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5595 else if (bitsize >= 0 && bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
5596 width_mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1;
5598 /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
5599 in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
5600 MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
5601 alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
5602 the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then
5603 call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
5604 that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not
5605 very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
5606 than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be
5607 cleaned up later. It's tempting to make OBJECT readonly, but it's set
5608 twice, once with emit_move_insn and once via store_field. */
5611 && (REG_P (target) || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG))
5613 rtx object = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
5614 rtx blk_object = adjust_address (object, BLKmode, 0);
5616 if (bitsize != (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
5617 emit_move_insn (object, target);
5619 store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, type, alias_set,
5622 emit_move_insn (target, object);
5624 /* We want to return the BLKmode version of the data. */
5628 if (GET_CODE (target) == CONCAT)
5630 /* We're storing into a struct containing a single __complex. */
5632 gcc_assert (!bitpos);
5633 return store_expr (exp, target, 0, nontemporal);
5636 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
5637 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
5638 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
5640 if (mode == VOIDmode
5641 || (mode != BLKmode && ! direct_store[(int) mode]
5642 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
5643 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5645 || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG
5646 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
5647 store it as a bit field. */
5649 && ((((MEM_ALIGN (target) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
5650 || bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode))
5651 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode, MEM_ALIGN (target)))
5652 || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)))
5653 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
5654 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
5657 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST
5658 && compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), bitsize) != 0))
5662 /* If EXP is a NOP_EXPR of precision less than its mode, then that
5663 implies a mask operation. If the precision is the same size as
5664 the field we're storing into, that mask is redundant. This is
5665 particularly common with bit field assignments generated by the
5667 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR)
5669 tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
5670 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type)
5671 && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))
5672 && bitsize == TYPE_PRECISION (type))
5674 type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
5675 if (INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (type) && TYPE_PRECISION (type) >= bitsize)
5676 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5680 temp = expand_normal (exp);
5682 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
5683 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
5684 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
5685 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
5686 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT
5687 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5688 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE)
5689 temp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (temp), temp,
5690 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp))
5694 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to
5696 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
5697 && mode != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
5698 temp = convert_modes (mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)), temp, 1);
5700 /* If the modes of TARGET and TEMP are both BLKmode, both
5701 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
5702 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. */
5703 if (GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
5705 gcc_assert (MEM_P (target) && MEM_P (temp)
5706 && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT));
5708 target = adjust_address (target, VOIDmode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5709 emit_block_move (target, temp,
5710 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
5717 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
5718 store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp);
5724 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
5725 rtx to_rtx = adjust_address (target, mode, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
5727 if (to_rtx == target)
5728 to_rtx = copy_rtx (to_rtx);
5730 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx, 1);
5731 if (!MEM_KEEP_ALIAS_SET_P (to_rtx) && MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx) != 0)
5732 set_mem_alias_set (to_rtx, alias_set);
5734 return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, 0, nontemporal);
5738 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
5739 an ARRAY_REF, or an ARRAY_RANGE_REF, look for nested operations of these
5740 codes and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
5742 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
5743 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
5744 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
5745 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
5746 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
5747 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
5749 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
5750 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
5752 If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode. Otherwise, it
5753 is a mode that can be used to access the field. In that case, *PBITSIZE
5756 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
5757 VOIDmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
5758 this case, but the address of the object can be found.
5760 If KEEP_ALIGNING is true and the target is STRICT_ALIGNMENT, we don't
5761 look through nodes that serve as markers of a greater alignment than
5762 the one that can be deduced from the expression. These nodes make it
5763 possible for front-ends to prevent temporaries from being created by
5764 the middle-end on alignment considerations. For that purpose, the
5765 normal operating mode at high-level is to always pass FALSE so that
5766 the ultimate containing object is really returned; moreover, the
5767 associated predicate handled_component_p will always return TRUE
5768 on these nodes, thus indicating that they are essentially handled
5769 by get_inner_reference. TRUE should only be passed when the caller
5770 is scanning the expression in order to build another representation
5771 and specifically knows how to handle these nodes; as such, this is
5772 the normal operating mode in the RTL expanders. */
5775 get_inner_reference (tree exp, HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitsize,
5776 HOST_WIDE_INT *pbitpos, tree *poffset,
5777 enum machine_mode *pmode, int *punsignedp,
5778 int *pvolatilep, bool keep_aligning)
5781 enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
5782 tree offset = size_zero_node;
5783 tree bit_offset = bitsize_zero_node;
5786 /* First get the mode, signedness, and size. We do this from just the
5787 outermost expression. */
5788 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
5790 size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5791 if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
5792 mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5794 *punsignedp = DECL_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
5796 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
5798 size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5799 *punsignedp = BIT_FIELD_REF_UNSIGNED (exp);
5801 /* For vector types, with the correct size of access, use the mode of
5803 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == VECTOR_TYPE
5804 && TREE_TYPE (exp) == TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
5805 && tree_int_cst_equal (size_tree, TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))))
5806 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5810 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5811 *punsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5813 if (mode == BLKmode)
5814 size_tree = TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5816 *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
5821 if (! host_integerp (size_tree, 1))
5822 mode = BLKmode, *pbitsize = -1;
5824 *pbitsize = tree_low_cst (size_tree, 1);
5827 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
5828 and find the ultimate containing object. */
5831 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
5834 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5835 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
5840 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5841 tree this_offset = component_ref_field_offset (exp);
5843 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go past it.
5844 This should only happen when folding expressions made during
5845 type construction. */
5846 if (this_offset == 0)
5849 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset, this_offset);
5850 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5851 DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET (field));
5853 /* ??? Right now we don't do anything with DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN. */
5858 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
5860 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5861 tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp);
5862 tree unit_size = array_ref_element_size (exp);
5864 /* We assume all arrays have sizes that are a multiple of a byte.
5865 First subtract the lower bound, if any, in the type of the
5866 index, then convert to sizetype and multiply by the size of
5867 the array element. */
5868 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound))
5869 index = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (index),
5872 offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, offset,
5873 size_binop (MULT_EXPR,
5874 fold_convert (sizetype, index),
5883 bit_offset = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, bit_offset,
5884 bitsize_int (*pbitsize));
5887 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
5888 if (keep_aligning && STRICT_ALIGNMENT
5889 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp))
5890 > TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
5891 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
5892 < BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT)
5893 && (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (exp))
5894 || TYPE_ALIGN_OK (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
5902 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
5903 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
5906 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5910 /* If OFFSET is constant, see if we can return the whole thing as a
5911 constant bit position. Otherwise, split it up. */
5912 if (host_integerp (offset, 0)
5913 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (MULT_EXPR,
5914 fold_convert (bitsizetype, offset),
5916 && 0 != (tem = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, tem, bit_offset))
5917 && host_integerp (tem, 0))
5918 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (tem, 0), *poffset = 0;
5920 *pbitpos = tree_low_cst (bit_offset, 0), *poffset = offset;
5926 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF or an ARRAY_REF,
5927 look for whether EXP or any nested component-refs within EXP is marked
5931 contains_packed_reference (const_tree exp)
5933 bool packed_p = false;
5937 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
5941 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5942 packed_p = DECL_PACKED (field)
5943 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (field))
5944 || TYPE_PACKED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
5952 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
5955 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
5961 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5967 /* Return a tree of sizetype representing the size, in bytes, of the element
5968 of EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
5971 array_ref_element_size (tree exp)
5973 tree aligned_size = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 3);
5974 tree elmt_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
5976 /* If a size was specified in the ARRAY_REF, it's the size measured
5977 in alignment units of the element type. So multiply by that value. */
5980 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
5981 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
5982 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_size) != sizetype)
5983 aligned_size = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_size);
5984 return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_size,
5985 size_int (TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (elmt_type)));
5988 /* Otherwise, take the size from that of the element type. Substitute
5989 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
5991 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elmt_type), exp);
5994 /* Return a tree representing the lower bound of the array mentioned in
5995 EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
5998 array_ref_low_bound (tree exp)
6000 tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6002 /* If a lower bound is specified in EXP, use it. */
6003 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
6004 return TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
6006 /* Otherwise, if there is a domain type and it has a lower bound, use it,
6007 substituting for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6008 if (domain_type && TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type))
6009 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain_type), exp);
6011 /* Otherwise, return a zero of the appropriate type. */
6012 return build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)), 0);
6015 /* Return a tree representing the upper bound of the array mentioned in
6016 EXP, an ARRAY_REF. */
6019 array_ref_up_bound (tree exp)
6021 tree domain_type = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
6023 /* If there is a domain type and it has an upper bound, use it, substituting
6024 for a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR as needed. */
6025 if (domain_type && TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type))
6026 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain_type), exp);
6028 /* Otherwise fail. */
6032 /* Return a tree representing the offset, in bytes, of the field referenced
6033 by EXP. This does not include any offset in DECL_FIELD_BIT_OFFSET. */
6036 component_ref_field_offset (tree exp)
6038 tree aligned_offset = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
6039 tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
6041 /* If an offset was specified in the COMPONENT_REF, it's the offset measured
6042 in units of DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN / BITS_PER_UNIT. So multiply by that
6046 /* ??? tree_ssa_useless_type_conversion will eliminate casts to
6047 sizetype from another type of the same width and signedness. */
6048 if (TREE_TYPE (aligned_offset) != sizetype)
6049 aligned_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, aligned_offset);
6050 return size_binop (MULT_EXPR, aligned_offset,
6051 size_int (DECL_OFFSET_ALIGN (field) / BITS_PER_UNIT));
6054 /* Otherwise, take the offset from that of the field. Substitute
6055 any PLACEHOLDER_EXPR that we have. */
6057 return SUBSTITUTE_PLACEHOLDER_IN_EXPR (DECL_FIELD_OFFSET (field), exp);
6060 /* Return 1 if T is an expression that get_inner_reference handles. */
6063 handled_component_p (const_tree t)
6065 switch (TREE_CODE (t))
6070 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
6071 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
6081 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications, return
6082 an equivalent value that just refers to a register, memory, or constant.
6083 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic and
6084 returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
6086 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
6089 force_operand (rtx value, rtx target)
6092 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6093 rtx subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
6094 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (value);
6096 /* Check for subreg applied to an expression produced by loop optimizer. */
6098 && !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (value))
6099 && !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value)))
6102 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value),
6103 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6104 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value),
6106 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6107 SUBREG_BYTE (value));
6108 code = GET_CODE (value);
6111 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
6112 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
6113 && XEXP (value, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
6114 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
6115 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == LABEL_REF
6116 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 1)) == CONST))
6119 subtarget = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
6120 emit_move_insn (subtarget, value);
6124 if (ARITHMETIC_P (value))
6126 op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
6127 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2) && !(REG_P (op2) && op2 != subtarget))
6129 if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT)
6132 op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2);
6135 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
6136 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
6137 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
6138 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
6139 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
6140 creating another one around this addition. */
6141 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
6142 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS
6143 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0))
6144 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
6145 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
6147 rtx temp = expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code,
6148 XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2,
6149 subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6150 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, temp,
6151 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value,
6153 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6156 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
6157 op2 = force_operand (op2, NULL_RTX);
6161 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 1);
6163 if (!INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value)))
6164 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6165 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6167 return expand_divmod (0,
6168 FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (value))
6169 ? RDIV_EXPR : TRUNC_DIV_EXPR,
6170 GET_MODE (value), op1, op2, target, 0);
6172 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6175 return expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6178 return expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR, GET_MODE (value), op1, op2,
6181 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6182 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6184 return expand_simple_binop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, op2,
6185 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6188 if (UNARY_P (value))
6191 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value));
6192 op1 = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), NULL_RTX);
6199 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
6200 convert_move (target, op1, code == ZERO_EXTEND);
6205 expand_fix (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FIX);
6209 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
6210 expand_float (target, op1, code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT);
6214 return expand_simple_unop (GET_MODE (value), code, op1, target, 0);
6218 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
6219 /* On machines that have insn scheduling, we want all memory reference to be
6220 explicit, so we need to deal with such paradoxical SUBREGs. */
6221 if (GET_CODE (value) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (value))
6222 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (value))
6223 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)))))
6225 = simplify_gen_subreg (GET_MODE (value),
6226 force_reg (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6227 force_operand (SUBREG_REG (value),
6229 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (value)),
6230 SUBREG_BYTE (value));
6236 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
6237 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
6238 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
6239 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
6241 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
6242 searches for optimization opportunities. */
6245 safe_from_p (rtx x, tree exp, int top_p)
6251 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
6252 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
6253 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
6254 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
6255 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
6256 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
6257 || (top_p && TREE_TYPE (exp) != 0 && COMPLETE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
6258 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) != INTEGER_CST
6259 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != ARRAY_TYPE
6260 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == NULL_TREE
6261 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
6263 && GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode)
6264 /* If X is in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
6266 && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
6267 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
6268 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx))))
6271 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
6272 find the underlying pseudo. */
6273 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
6276 if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6280 /* Now look at our tree code and possibly recurse. */
6281 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)))
6283 case tcc_declaration:
6284 exp_rtl = DECL_RTL_IF_SET (exp);
6290 case tcc_exceptional:
6291 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST)
6295 if (TREE_VALUE (exp) && !safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp), 0))
6297 exp = TREE_CHAIN (exp);
6300 if (TREE_CODE (exp) != TREE_LIST)
6301 return safe_from_p (x, exp, 0);
6304 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR)
6306 constructor_elt *ce;
6307 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
6310 VEC_iterate (constructor_elt, CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, ce);
6312 if ((ce->index != NULL_TREE && !safe_from_p (x, ce->index, 0))
6313 || !safe_from_p (x, ce->value, 0))
6317 else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK)
6318 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
6323 /* The only case we look at here is the DECL_INITIAL inside a
6325 return (TREE_CODE (exp) != DECL_EXPR
6326 || TREE_CODE (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)) != VAR_DECL
6327 || !DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp))
6328 || safe_from_p (x, DECL_INITIAL (DECL_EXPR_DECL (exp)), 0));
6331 case tcc_comparison:
6332 if (!safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
6337 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6339 case tcc_expression:
6342 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
6343 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
6344 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
6345 expression recursively. */
6347 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6350 /* If the operand is static or we are static, we can't conflict.
6351 Likewise if we don't conflict with the operand at all. */
6352 if (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
6353 || TREE_STATIC (exp)
6354 || safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))
6357 /* Otherwise, the only way this can conflict is if we are taking
6358 the address of a DECL a that address if part of X, which is
6360 exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6363 if (!DECL_RTL_SET_P (exp)
6364 || !MEM_P (DECL_RTL (exp)))
6367 exp_rtl = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
6371 case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF:
6372 case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF:
6375 && alias_sets_conflict_p (MEM_ALIAS_SET (x),
6376 get_alias_set (exp)))
6381 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
6383 if ((REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6388 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
6389 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
6390 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
6394 return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
6400 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
6404 nops = TREE_OPERAND_LENGTH (exp);
6405 for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
6406 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0
6407 && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i), 0))
6413 /* Should never get a type here. */
6416 case tcc_gimple_stmt:
6420 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
6424 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG)
6426 exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl);
6428 && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6432 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
6433 are memory and they conflict. */
6434 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl)
6435 || (MEM_P (x) && MEM_P (exp_rtl)
6436 && true_dependence (exp_rtl, VOIDmode, x,
6437 rtx_addr_varies_p)));
6440 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
6445 /* Return the highest power of two that EXP is known to be a multiple of.
6446 This is used in updating alignment of MEMs in array references. */
6448 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6449 highest_pow2_factor (const_tree exp)
6451 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c0, c1;
6453 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6456 /* We can find the lowest bit that's a one. If the low
6457 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT bits are zero, return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT.
6458 We need to handle this case since we can find it in a COND_EXPR,
6459 a MIN_EXPR, or a MAX_EXPR. If the constant overflows, we have an
6460 erroneous program, so return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT to avoid any
6462 if (TREE_OVERFLOW (exp))
6463 return BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6466 /* Note: tree_low_cst is intentionally not used here,
6467 we don't care about the upper bits. */
6468 c0 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp);
6470 return c0 ? c0 : BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT;
6474 case PLUS_EXPR: case MINUS_EXPR: case MIN_EXPR: case MAX_EXPR:
6475 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6476 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6477 return MIN (c0, c1);
6480 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6481 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6484 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR: case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR: case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
6486 if (integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
6487 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
6489 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6490 c1 = tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1);
6491 return MAX (1, c0 / c1);
6495 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR: case NOP_EXPR: case CONVERT_EXPR:
6497 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
6500 return highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6503 c0 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
6504 c1 = highest_pow2_factor (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
6505 return MIN (c0, c1);
6514 /* Similar, except that the alignment requirements of TARGET are
6515 taken into account. Assume it is at least as aligned as its
6516 type, unless it is a COMPONENT_REF in which case the layout of
6517 the structure gives the alignment. */
6519 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
6520 highest_pow2_factor_for_target (const_tree target, const_tree exp)
6522 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT target_align, factor;
6524 factor = highest_pow2_factor (exp);
6525 if (TREE_CODE (target) == COMPONENT_REF)
6526 target_align = DECL_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_OPERAND (target, 1));
6528 target_align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (target));
6529 return MAX (factor, target_align);
6532 /* Return &VAR expression for emulated thread local VAR. */
6535 emutls_var_address (tree var)
6537 tree emuvar = emutls_decl (var);
6538 tree fn = built_in_decls [BUILT_IN_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS];
6539 tree arg = build_fold_addr_expr_with_type (emuvar, ptr_type_node);
6540 tree arglist = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE, arg);
6541 tree call = build_function_call_expr (fn, arglist);
6542 return fold_convert (build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (var)), call);
6545 /* Expands variable VAR. */
6548 expand_var (tree var)
6550 if (DECL_EXTERNAL (var))
6553 if (TREE_STATIC (var))
6554 /* If this is an inlined copy of a static local variable,
6555 look up the original decl. */
6556 var = DECL_ORIGIN (var);
6558 if (TREE_STATIC (var)
6559 ? !TREE_ASM_WRITTEN (var)
6560 : !DECL_RTL_SET_P (var))
6562 if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && DECL_HAS_VALUE_EXPR_P (var))
6563 /* Should be ignored. */;
6564 else if (lang_hooks.expand_decl (var))
6566 else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && !TREE_STATIC (var))
6568 else if (TREE_CODE (var) == VAR_DECL && TREE_STATIC (var))
6569 rest_of_decl_compilation (var, 0, 0);
6571 /* No expansion needed. */
6572 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE (var) == TYPE_DECL
6573 || TREE_CODE (var) == CONST_DECL
6574 || TREE_CODE (var) == FUNCTION_DECL
6575 || TREE_CODE (var) == LABEL_DECL);
6579 /* Subroutine of expand_expr. Expand the two operands of a binary
6580 expression EXP0 and EXP1 placing the results in OP0 and OP1.
6581 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero. The
6582 MODIFIER argument is as documented by expand_expr. */
6585 expand_operands (tree exp0, tree exp1, rtx target, rtx *op0, rtx *op1,
6586 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6588 if (! safe_from_p (target, exp1, 1))
6590 if (operand_equal_p (exp0, exp1, 0))
6592 *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
6593 *op1 = copy_rtx (*op0);
6597 /* If we need to preserve evaluation order, copy exp0 into its own
6598 temporary variable so that it can't be clobbered by exp1. */
6599 if (flag_evaluation_order && TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp1))
6600 exp0 = save_expr (exp0);
6601 *op0 = expand_expr (exp0, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
6602 *op1 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
6607 /* Return a MEM that contains constant EXP. DEFER is as for
6608 output_constant_def and MODIFIER is as for expand_expr. */
6611 expand_expr_constant (tree exp, int defer, enum expand_modifier modifier)
6615 mem = output_constant_def (exp, defer);
6616 if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6617 mem = use_anchored_address (mem);
6621 /* A subroutine of expand_expr_addr_expr. Evaluate the address of EXP.
6622 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
6625 expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6626 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6628 rtx result, subtarget;
6630 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
6631 int volatilep, unsignedp;
6632 enum machine_mode mode1;
6634 /* If we are taking the address of a constant and are at the top level,
6635 we have to use output_constant_def since we can't call force_const_mem
6637 /* ??? This should be considered a front-end bug. We should not be
6638 generating ADDR_EXPR of something that isn't an LVALUE. The only
6639 exception here is STRING_CST. */
6640 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == CONSTRUCTOR
6641 || CONSTANT_CLASS_P (exp))
6642 return XEXP (expand_expr_constant (exp, 0, modifier), 0);
6644 /* Everything must be something allowed by is_gimple_addressable. */
6645 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
6648 /* This case will happen via recursion for &a->b. */
6649 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
6652 /* Recurse and make the output_constant_def clause above handle this. */
6653 return expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target,
6657 /* The real part of the complex number is always first, therefore
6658 the address is the same as the address of the parent object. */
6661 inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6665 /* The imaginary part of the complex number is always second.
6666 The expression is therefore always offset by the size of the
6669 bitpos = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
6670 inner = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
6674 /* TLS emulation hook - replace __thread VAR's &VAR with
6675 __emutls_get_address (&_emutls.VAR). */
6676 if (! targetm.have_tls
6677 && TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
6678 && DECL_THREAD_LOCAL_P (exp))
6680 exp = emutls_var_address (exp);
6681 return expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
6686 /* If the object is a DECL, then expand it for its rtl. Don't bypass
6687 expand_expr, as that can have various side effects; LABEL_DECLs for
6688 example, may not have their DECL_RTL set yet. Assume language
6689 specific tree nodes can be expanded in some interesting way. */
6691 || TREE_CODE (exp) >= LAST_AND_UNUSED_TREE_CODE)
6693 result = expand_expr (exp, target, tmode,
6694 modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6695 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS);
6697 /* If the DECL isn't in memory, then the DECL wasn't properly
6698 marked TREE_ADDRESSABLE, which will be either a front-end
6699 or a tree optimizer bug. */
6700 gcc_assert (MEM_P (result));
6701 result = XEXP (result, 0);
6703 /* ??? Is this needed anymore? */
6704 if (DECL_P (exp) && !TREE_USED (exp) == 0)
6706 assemble_external (exp);
6707 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
6710 if (modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6711 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
6712 result = force_operand (result, target);
6716 /* Pass FALSE as the last argument to get_inner_reference although
6717 we are expanding to RTL. The rationale is that we know how to
6718 handle "aligning nodes" here: we can just bypass them because
6719 they won't change the final object whose address will be returned
6720 (they actually exist only for that purpose). */
6721 inner = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset,
6722 &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, false);
6726 /* We must have made progress. */
6727 gcc_assert (inner != exp);
6729 subtarget = offset || bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target;
6730 result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (inner, subtarget, tmode, modifier);
6736 if (modifier != EXPAND_NORMAL)
6737 result = force_operand (result, NULL);
6738 tmp = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, tmode,
6739 modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6740 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_NORMAL);
6742 result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result);
6743 tmp = convert_memory_address (tmode, tmp);
6745 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
6746 result = gen_rtx_PLUS (tmode, result, tmp);
6749 subtarget = bitpos ? NULL_RTX : target;
6750 result = expand_simple_binop (tmode, PLUS, result, tmp, subtarget,
6751 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6757 /* Someone beforehand should have rejected taking the address
6758 of such an object. */
6759 gcc_assert ((bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT) == 0);
6761 result = plus_constant (result, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
6762 if (modifier < EXPAND_SUM)
6763 result = force_operand (result, target);
6769 /* A subroutine of expand_expr. Evaluate EXP, which is an ADDR_EXPR.
6770 The TARGET, TMODE and MODIFIER arguments are as for expand_expr. */
6773 expand_expr_addr_expr (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6774 enum expand_modifier modifier)
6776 enum machine_mode rmode;
6779 /* Target mode of VOIDmode says "whatever's natural". */
6780 if (tmode == VOIDmode)
6781 tmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
6783 /* We can get called with some Weird Things if the user does silliness
6784 like "(short) &a". In that case, convert_memory_address won't do
6785 the right thing, so ignore the given target mode. */
6786 if (tmode != Pmode && tmode != ptr_mode)
6789 result = expand_expr_addr_expr_1 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target,
6792 /* Despite expand_expr claims concerning ignoring TMODE when not
6793 strictly convenient, stuff breaks if we don't honor it. Note
6794 that combined with the above, we only do this for pointer modes. */
6795 rmode = GET_MODE (result);
6796 if (rmode == VOIDmode)
6799 result = convert_memory_address (tmode, result);
6805 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
6806 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
6807 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
6809 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
6810 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6811 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
6813 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
6815 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
6816 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
6817 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
6818 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
6819 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
6821 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
6822 probably will not be used.
6824 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
6825 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
6826 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
6827 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
6828 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
6829 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
6831 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
6832 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
6833 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
6834 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
6836 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
6837 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
6838 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
6840 EXPAND_STACK_PARM is used when expanding to a TARGET on the stack for
6841 a call parameter. Such targets require special care as we haven't yet
6842 marked TARGET so that it's safe from being trashed by libcalls. We
6843 don't want to use TARGET for anything but the final result;
6844 Intermediate values must go elsewhere. Additionally, calls to
6845 emit_block_move will be flagged with BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM.
6847 If EXP is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL was a MEM with an invalid
6848 address, and ALT_RTL is non-NULL, then *ALT_RTL is set to the
6849 DECL_RTL of the VAR_DECL. *ALT_RTL is also set if EXP is a
6850 COMPOUND_EXPR whose second argument is such a VAR_DECL, and so on
6853 static rtx expand_expr_real_1 (tree, rtx, enum machine_mode,
6854 enum expand_modifier, rtx *);
6857 expand_expr_real (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6858 enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl)
6861 rtx ret, last = NULL;
6863 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
6864 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ERROR_MARK
6865 || (!GIMPLE_TUPLE_P (exp) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ERROR_MARK))
6867 ret = CONST0_RTX (tmode);
6868 return ret ? ret : const0_rtx;
6871 if (flag_non_call_exceptions)
6873 rn = lookup_stmt_eh_region (exp);
6874 /* If rn < 0, then either (1) tree-ssa not used or (2) doesn't throw. */
6876 last = get_last_insn ();
6879 /* If this is an expression of some kind and it has an associated line
6880 number, then emit the line number before expanding the expression.
6882 We need to save and restore the file and line information so that
6883 errors discovered during expansion are emitted with the right
6884 information. It would be better of the diagnostic routines
6885 used the file/line information embedded in the tree nodes rather
6887 if (cfun && EXPR_HAS_LOCATION (exp))
6889 location_t saved_location = input_location;
6890 input_location = EXPR_LOCATION (exp);
6891 set_curr_insn_source_location (input_location);
6893 /* Record where the insns produced belong. */
6894 set_curr_insn_block (TREE_BLOCK (exp));
6896 ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
6898 input_location = saved_location;
6902 ret = expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
6905 /* If using non-call exceptions, mark all insns that may trap.
6906 expand_call() will mark CALL_INSNs before we get to this code,
6907 but it doesn't handle libcalls, and these may trap. */
6911 for (insn = next_real_insn (last); insn;
6912 insn = next_real_insn (insn))
6914 if (! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EH_REGION, NULL_RTX)
6915 /* If we want exceptions for non-call insns, any
6916 may_trap_p instruction may throw. */
6917 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != CLOBBER
6918 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) != USE
6919 && (CALL_P (insn) || may_trap_p (PATTERN (insn))))
6921 REG_NOTES (insn) = alloc_EXPR_LIST (REG_EH_REGION, GEN_INT (rn),
6931 expand_expr_real_1 (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode tmode,
6932 enum expand_modifier modifier, rtx *alt_rtl)
6934 rtx op0, op1, op2, temp, decl_rtl;
6937 enum machine_mode mode;
6938 enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
6940 rtx subtarget, original_target;
6942 tree context, subexp0, subexp1;
6943 bool reduce_bit_field = false;
6944 #define REDUCE_BIT_FIELD(expr) (reduce_bit_field && !ignore \
6945 ? reduce_to_bit_field_precision ((expr), \
6950 if (GIMPLE_STMT_P (exp))
6952 type = void_type_node;
6958 type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
6959 mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
6960 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type);
6962 if (lang_hooks.reduce_bit_field_operations
6963 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
6964 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > TYPE_PRECISION (type))
6966 /* An operation in what may be a bit-field type needs the
6967 result to be reduced to the precision of the bit-field type,
6968 which is narrower than that of the type's mode. */
6969 reduce_bit_field = true;
6970 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
6974 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
6975 subtarget = get_subtarget (target);
6976 original_target = target;
6977 ignore = (target == const0_rtx
6978 || ((code == NON_LVALUE_EXPR || code == NOP_EXPR
6979 || code == CONVERT_EXPR || code == COND_EXPR
6980 || code == VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR)
6981 && TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE));
6983 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
6984 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
6985 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
6986 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
6987 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
6991 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp))
6994 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
6995 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
6996 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)
6997 && TREE_CODE (exp) != FUNCTION_DECL
6998 && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode
6999 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
7001 temp = expand_expr (exp, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, modifier);
7003 temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
7007 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_unary
7008 || code == COMPONENT_REF || code == INDIRECT_REF)
7009 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode,
7012 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_binary
7013 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code) == tcc_comparison
7014 || code == ARRAY_REF || code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF)
7016 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7017 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7020 else if (code == BIT_FIELD_REF)
7022 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7023 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7024 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
7036 tree function = decl_function_context (exp);
7038 temp = label_rtx (exp);
7039 temp = gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, temp);
7041 if (function != current_function_decl
7043 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (temp) = 1;
7045 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, temp);
7050 return expand_expr_real_1 (SSA_NAME_VAR (exp), target, tmode, modifier,
7055 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
7056 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
7057 if (DECL_SIZE (exp) == 0
7058 && COMPLETE_OR_UNBOUND_ARRAY_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp))
7059 && (TREE_STATIC (exp) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp)))
7060 layout_decl (exp, 0);
7062 /* TLS emulation hook - replace __thread vars with
7063 *__emutls_get_address (&_emutls.var). */
7064 if (! targetm.have_tls
7065 && TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
7066 && DECL_THREAD_LOCAL_P (exp))
7068 exp = build_fold_indirect_ref (emutls_var_address (exp));
7069 return expand_expr_real_1 (exp, target, tmode, modifier, NULL);
7072 /* ... fall through ... */
7076 decl_rtl = DECL_RTL (exp);
7077 gcc_assert (decl_rtl);
7078 decl_rtl = copy_rtx (decl_rtl);
7080 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
7081 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
7083 if (! TREE_USED (exp))
7085 assemble_external (exp);
7086 TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
7089 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
7092 /* Variables inherited from containing functions should have
7093 been lowered by this point. */
7094 context = decl_function_context (exp);
7095 gcc_assert (!context
7096 || context == current_function_decl
7097 || TREE_STATIC (exp)
7098 /* ??? C++ creates functions that are not TREE_STATIC. */
7099 || TREE_CODE (exp) == FUNCTION_DECL);
7101 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
7102 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
7105 if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)))
7106 temp = validize_mem (decl_rtl);
7108 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and either
7109 the address is not valid or it is not a register and -fforce-addr
7110 is specified, get the address into a register. */
7112 else if (MEM_P (decl_rtl) && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7115 *alt_rtl = decl_rtl;
7116 decl_rtl = use_anchored_address (decl_rtl);
7117 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7118 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
7119 && (!memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp), XEXP (decl_rtl, 0))
7120 || (flag_force_addr && !REG_P (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)))))
7121 temp = replace_equiv_address (decl_rtl,
7122 copy_rtx (XEXP (decl_rtl, 0)));
7125 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
7126 if the address is a register. */
7129 if (MEM_P (temp) && REG_P (XEXP (temp, 0)))
7130 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp, 0), DECL_ALIGN (exp));
7135 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it
7136 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
7137 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
7139 if (REG_P (decl_rtl)
7140 && GET_MODE (decl_rtl) != DECL_MODE (exp))
7142 enum machine_mode pmode;
7144 /* Get the signedness used for this variable. Ensure we get the
7145 same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
7146 pmode = promote_mode (type, DECL_MODE (exp), &unsignedp,
7147 (TREE_CODE (exp) == RESULT_DECL
7148 || TREE_CODE (exp) == PARM_DECL) ? 1 : 0);
7149 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (decl_rtl) == pmode);
7151 temp = gen_lowpart_SUBREG (mode, decl_rtl);
7152 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp) = 1;
7153 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_SET (temp, unsignedp);
7160 temp = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp),
7161 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp), mode);
7167 tree tmp = NULL_TREE;
7168 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
7169 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)
7170 return const_vector_from_tree (exp);
7171 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
7173 tree type_for_mode = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, 1);
7175 tmp = fold_unary (VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR, type_for_mode, exp);
7178 tmp = build_constructor_from_list (type,
7179 TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp));
7180 return expand_expr (tmp, ignore ? const0_rtx : target,
7185 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, modifier);
7188 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
7189 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
7191 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
7192 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
7193 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
7194 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
7195 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
7197 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
7198 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (exp),
7199 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
7202 /* Handle evaluating a complex constant in a CONCAT target. */
7203 if (original_target && GET_CODE (original_target) == CONCAT)
7205 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
7208 rtarg = XEXP (original_target, 0);
7209 itarg = XEXP (original_target, 1);
7211 /* Move the real and imaginary parts separately. */
7212 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_REALPART (exp), rtarg, mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7213 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_IMAGPART (exp), itarg, mode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7216 emit_move_insn (rtarg, op0);
7218 emit_move_insn (itarg, op1);
7220 return original_target;
7223 /* ... fall through ... */
7226 temp = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier);
7228 /* temp contains a constant address.
7229 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
7230 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
7231 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7232 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7233 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
7234 && (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (temp, 0))
7235 || flag_force_addr))
7236 return replace_equiv_address (temp,
7237 copy_rtx (XEXP (temp, 0)));
7242 tree val = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7243 rtx ret = expand_expr_real_1 (val, target, tmode, modifier, alt_rtl);
7245 if (!SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp))
7247 /* We can indeed still hit this case, typically via builtin
7248 expanders calling save_expr immediately before expanding
7249 something. Assume this means that we only have to deal
7250 with non-BLKmode values. */
7251 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (ret) != BLKmode);
7253 val = build_decl (VAR_DECL, NULL, TREE_TYPE (exp));
7254 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (val) = 1;
7255 DECL_IGNORED_P (val) = 1;
7256 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = val;
7257 SAVE_EXPR_RESOLVED_P (exp) = 1;
7259 if (!CONSTANT_P (ret))
7260 ret = copy_to_reg (ret);
7261 SET_DECL_RTL (val, ret);
7268 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == LABEL_DECL)
7269 expand_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7271 expand_computed_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7275 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
7279 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
7282 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_VALUE (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), idx, value)
7283 expand_expr (value, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
7288 /* Try to avoid creating a temporary at all. This is possible
7289 if all of the initializer is zero.
7290 FIXME: try to handle all [0..255] initializers we can handle
7292 else if (TREE_STATIC (exp)
7293 && !TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)
7294 && target != 0 && mode == BLKmode
7295 && all_zeros_p (exp))
7297 clear_storage (target, expr_size (exp), BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
7301 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
7302 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
7303 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
7304 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
7305 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
7306 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
7307 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well.
7309 FIXME: Avoid trying to fill vector constructors piece-meal.
7310 Output them with output_constant_def below unless we're sure
7311 they're zeros. This should go away when vector initializers
7312 are treated like VECTOR_CST instead of arrays.
7314 else if ((TREE_STATIC (exp)
7315 && ((mode == BLKmode
7316 && ! (target != 0 && safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)))
7317 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp)
7318 || (host_integerp (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1)
7319 && (! MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
7320 (tree_low_cst (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (type), 1),
7322 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp))))
7323 || ((modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7324 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS)
7325 && TREE_CONSTANT (exp)))
7327 rtx constructor = expand_expr_constant (exp, 1, modifier);
7329 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7330 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7331 && modifier != EXPAND_SUM)
7332 constructor = validize_mem (constructor);
7338 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
7339 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
7340 if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
7341 || GET_CODE (target) == PARALLEL
7342 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7344 = assign_temp (build_qualified_type (type,
7346 | (TREE_READONLY (exp)
7347 * TYPE_QUAL_CONST))),
7348 0, TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp), 1);
7350 store_constructor (exp, target, 0, int_expr_size (exp));
7354 case MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF:
7355 case ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF:
7358 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7360 if (modifier != EXPAND_WRITE)
7364 t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp);
7366 return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier);
7369 op0 = expand_expr (exp1, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
7370 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7372 if (code == ALIGN_INDIRECT_REF)
7374 int align = TYPE_ALIGN_UNIT (type);
7375 op0 = gen_rtx_AND (Pmode, op0, GEN_INT (-align));
7376 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7379 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0);
7381 set_mem_attributes (temp, exp, 0);
7383 /* Resolve the misalignment now, so that we don't have to remember
7384 to resolve it later. Of course, this only works for reads. */
7385 /* ??? When we get around to supporting writes, we'll have to handle
7386 this in store_expr directly. The vectorizer isn't generating
7387 those yet, however. */
7388 if (code == MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF)
7393 gcc_assert (modifier == EXPAND_NORMAL
7394 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM);
7396 /* The vectorizer should have already checked the mode. */
7397 icode = optab_handler (movmisalign_optab, mode)->insn_code;
7398 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing);
7400 /* We've already validated the memory, and we're creating a
7401 new pseudo destination. The predicates really can't fail. */
7402 reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
7404 /* Nor can the insn generator. */
7405 insn = GEN_FCN (icode) (reg, temp);
7414 case TARGET_MEM_REF:
7416 struct mem_address addr;
7418 get_address_description (exp, &addr);
7419 op0 = addr_for_mem_ref (&addr, true);
7420 op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
7421 temp = gen_rtx_MEM (mode, op0);
7422 set_mem_attributes (temp, TMR_ORIGINAL (exp), 0);
7429 tree array = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
7430 tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
7432 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
7433 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
7434 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
7435 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
7437 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7438 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7439 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY)
7441 tree t = fold_read_from_constant_string (exp);
7444 return expand_expr (t, target, tmode, modifier);
7447 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
7448 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
7449 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
7450 that was declared const. */
7452 if (modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7453 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7454 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY
7455 && TREE_CODE (array) == CONSTRUCTOR
7456 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7457 && TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
7459 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix;
7462 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (array), ix,
7464 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index))
7466 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value))
7467 return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode, modifier);
7472 else if (optimize >= 1
7473 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7474 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7475 && modifier != EXPAND_MEMORY
7476 && TREE_READONLY (array) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
7477 && TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL && DECL_INITIAL (array)
7478 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != ERROR_MARK
7479 && targetm.binds_local_p (array))
7481 if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
7483 tree init = DECL_INITIAL (array);
7485 if (TREE_CODE (init) == CONSTRUCTOR)
7487 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ix;
7490 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init), ix,
7492 if (tree_int_cst_equal (field, index))
7494 if (!TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (value))
7495 return expand_expr (fold (value), target, tmode,
7500 else if(TREE_CODE (init) == STRING_CST)
7502 tree index1 = index;
7503 tree low_bound = array_ref_low_bound (exp);
7504 index1 = fold_convert (sizetype, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
7506 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
7508 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
7509 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
7510 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion,l (ARRAY
7511 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
7512 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Opps!) */
7514 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound))
7515 index1 = size_diffop (index1, fold_convert (sizetype,
7518 if (0 > compare_tree_int (index1,
7519 TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init)))
7521 tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (init));
7522 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
7524 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
7525 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == 1)
7526 return gen_int_mode (TREE_STRING_POINTER (init)
7527 [TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index1)],
7534 goto normal_inner_ref;
7537 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
7538 appropriate field if it is present. */
7539 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR)
7541 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT idx;
7544 FOR_EACH_CONSTRUCTOR_ELT (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
7546 if (field == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)
7547 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
7548 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
7549 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
7550 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
7551 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
7552 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
7553 we can't do this optimization. */
7554 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)
7555 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (field)) == MODE_INT)
7556 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (field))
7557 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))))
7559 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field)
7560 && modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7562 op0 = expand_expr (value, target, tmode, modifier);
7563 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
7565 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field));
7566 enum machine_mode imode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (field));
7568 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (field)))
7570 op1 = GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << bitsize) - 1);
7571 op0 = expand_and (imode, op0, op1, target);
7576 = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
7577 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode) - bitsize);
7579 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7581 op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, imode, op0, count,
7589 goto normal_inner_ref;
7592 case ARRAY_RANGE_REF:
7595 enum machine_mode mode1;
7596 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize, bitpos;
7599 tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &offset,
7600 &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep, true);
7603 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
7604 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
7605 infinitely recurse. */
7606 gcc_assert (tem != exp);
7608 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
7609 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
7610 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
7614 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem)) == UNION_TYPE
7615 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem)))
7617 && modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7618 ? target : NULL_RTX),
7620 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7621 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7622 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
7623 ? modifier : EXPAND_NORMAL);
7625 /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a legitimate
7626 constant, OFFSET is 0, and we won't try to extract outside the
7627 register (in case we were passed a partially uninitialized object
7628 or a view_conversion to a larger size). Force the constant to
7629 memory otherwise. */
7630 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7632 enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem));
7633 if (mode != BLKmode && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0)
7635 && bitpos + bitsize <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
7636 op0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
7638 op0 = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, op0));
7641 /* Otherwise, if this object not in memory and we either have an
7642 offset, a BLKmode result, or a reference outside the object, put it
7643 there. Such cases can occur in Ada if we have unchecked conversion
7644 of an expression from a scalar type to an array or record type or
7645 for an ARRAY_RANGE_REF whose type is BLKmode. */
7646 else if (!MEM_P (op0)
7648 || (bitpos + bitsize > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7649 || (code == ARRAY_RANGE_REF && mode == BLKmode)))
7651 tree nt = build_qualified_type (TREE_TYPE (tem),
7652 (TYPE_QUALS (TREE_TYPE (tem))
7653 | TYPE_QUAL_CONST));
7654 rtx memloc = assign_temp (nt, 1, 1, 1);
7656 emit_move_insn (memloc, op0);
7662 rtx offset_rtx = expand_expr (offset, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode,
7665 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0));
7667 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
7668 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != Pmode)
7669 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (Pmode, offset_rtx, 0);
7671 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx) != ptr_mode)
7672 offset_rtx = convert_to_mode (ptr_mode, offset_rtx, 0);
7675 if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode
7676 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must
7677 not try to call force_reg in that case. */
7678 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) != VOIDmode
7680 && (bitpos % bitsize) == 0
7681 && (bitsize % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)) == 0
7682 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1))
7684 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7688 op0 = offset_address (op0, offset_rtx,
7689 highest_pow2_factor (offset));
7692 /* If OFFSET is making OP0 more aligned than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT,
7693 record its alignment as BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
7694 if (MEM_P (op0) && bitpos == 0 && offset != 0
7695 && is_aligning_offset (offset, tem))
7696 set_mem_align (op0, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT);
7698 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
7699 if (MEM_P (op0) && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0))
7701 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7702 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7704 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1;
7707 /* The following code doesn't handle CONCAT.
7708 Assume only bitpos == 0 can be used for CONCAT, due to
7709 one element arrays having the same mode as its element. */
7710 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONCAT)
7712 gcc_assert (bitpos == 0
7713 && bitsize == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)));
7717 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
7718 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
7719 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
7720 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
7721 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
7722 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode. */
7723 if (mode1 == VOIDmode
7724 || REG_P (op0) || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
7725 || (mode1 != BLKmode && ! direct_load[(int) mode1]
7726 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
7727 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
7728 && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7729 && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7730 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
7731 fetch it as a bit field. */
7732 || (mode1 != BLKmode
7733 && (((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode)
7734 || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) != 0)
7736 && (MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1)
7737 || (bitpos % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1) != 0))))
7738 && ((modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7739 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7741 : SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1, MEM_ALIGN (op0))))
7742 || (bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT != 0)))
7743 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
7744 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
7745 we must use bitfield operations. */
7747 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))
7748 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST
7749 && 0 != compare_tree_int (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
7752 enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode;
7754 if (ext_mode == BLKmode
7755 && ! (target != 0 && MEM_P (op0)
7757 && bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT == 0))
7758 ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1);
7760 if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
7763 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7768 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
7769 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
7770 gcc_assert (MEM_P (op0)
7771 && (!target || MEM_P (target))
7772 && !(bitpos % BITS_PER_UNIT));
7774 emit_block_move (target,
7775 adjust_address (op0, VOIDmode,
7776 bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT),
7777 GEN_INT ((bitsize + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
7779 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7780 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
7785 op0 = validize_mem (op0);
7787 if (MEM_P (op0) && REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0)))
7788 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7790 op0 = extract_bit_field (op0, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
7791 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
7792 ? NULL_RTX : target),
7793 ext_mode, ext_mode);
7795 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
7796 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
7797 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
7798 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE && BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7799 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
7800 && bitsize < (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
7801 op0 = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
7802 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
7806 /* If the result type is BLKmode, store the data into a temporary
7807 of the appropriate type, but with the mode corresponding to the
7808 mode for the data we have (op0's mode). It's tempting to make
7809 this a constant type, since we know it's only being stored once,
7810 but that can cause problems if we are taking the address of this
7811 COMPONENT_REF because the MEM of any reference via that address
7812 will have flags corresponding to the type, which will not
7813 necessarily be constant. */
7814 if (mode == BLKmode)
7816 HOST_WIDE_INT size = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (ext_mode);
7819 /* If the reference doesn't use the alias set of its type,
7820 we cannot create the temporary using that type. */
7821 if (component_uses_parent_alias_set (exp))
7823 new = assign_stack_local (ext_mode, size, 0);
7824 set_mem_alias_set (new, get_alias_set (exp));
7827 new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (ext_mode, size, 0, type);
7829 emit_move_insn (new, op0);
7830 op0 = copy_rtx (new);
7831 PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode);
7832 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 1);
7838 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
7840 if (mode == BLKmode)
7843 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
7844 if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7845 || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7846 op0 = adjust_address_nv (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7848 op0 = adjust_address (op0, mode1, bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7850 if (op0 == orig_op0)
7851 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
7853 set_mem_attributes (op0, exp, 0);
7854 if (REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0)))
7855 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0, 0), MEM_ALIGN (op0));
7857 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep;
7858 if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode
7859 || modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
7860 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7862 else if (target == 0)
7863 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
7865 convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
7870 return expand_expr (OBJ_TYPE_REF_EXPR (exp), target, tmode, modifier);
7873 /* Check for a built-in function. */
7874 if (TREE_CODE (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp)) == ADDR_EXPR
7875 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0))
7877 && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0)))
7879 if (DECL_BUILT_IN_CLASS (TREE_OPERAND (CALL_EXPR_FN (exp), 0))
7880 == BUILT_IN_FRONTEND)
7881 return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target,
7885 return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore);
7888 return expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
7890 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
7893 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) == error_mark_node)
7896 if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
7898 tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7900 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion isn't doing
7901 anything except possibly changing memory attribute. */
7902 if (mode == BLKmode && TYPE_MODE (valtype) == BLKmode)
7904 rtx result = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode,
7907 result = copy_rtx (result);
7908 set_mem_attributes (result, exp, 0);
7914 if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode)
7915 target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (type));
7917 target = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 1);
7921 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
7922 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7923 adjust_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0),
7924 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
7929 gcc_assert (REG_P (target));
7931 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
7932 store_field (target,
7933 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
7934 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
7936 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)),
7937 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
7941 /* Return the entire union. */
7945 if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
7947 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode,
7950 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
7951 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
7952 have to do the proper extension. */
7953 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != unsignedp
7954 && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
7955 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0) = 0;
7957 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
7960 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode,
7961 modifier == EXPAND_SUM ? EXPAND_NORMAL : modifier);
7962 if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
7965 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
7966 else if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
7968 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
7969 enum machine_mode inner_mode = TYPE_MODE (inner_type);
7971 if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7972 op0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, op0, inner_mode,
7973 subreg_lowpart_offset (mode,
7976 op0= convert_modes (mode, inner_mode, op0,
7977 TYPE_UNSIGNED (inner_type));
7980 else if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
7981 op0 = gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND, mode, op0);
7983 else if (target == 0)
7984 op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0,
7985 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
7986 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7989 convert_move (target, op0,
7990 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
7994 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
7996 case VIEW_CONVERT_EXPR:
7997 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), NULL_RTX, mode, modifier);
7999 /* If the input and output modes are both the same, we are done. */
8000 if (TYPE_MODE (type) == GET_MODE (op0))
8002 /* If neither mode is BLKmode, and both modes are the same size
8003 then we can use gen_lowpart. */
8004 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (op0) != BLKmode
8005 && GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))
8006 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)))
8008 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
8009 op0 = force_reg (GET_MODE (op0), op0);
8010 op0 = gen_lowpart (TYPE_MODE (type), op0);
8012 /* If both modes are integral, then we can convert from one to the
8014 else if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
8015 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (type)))
8016 op0 = convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (type), GET_MODE (op0), op0,
8017 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8018 /* As a last resort, spill op0 to memory, and reload it in a
8020 else if (!MEM_P (op0))
8022 /* If the operand is not a MEM, force it into memory. Since we
8023 are going to be changing the mode of the MEM, don't call
8024 force_const_mem for constants because we don't allow pool
8025 constants to change mode. */
8026 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8028 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp));
8030 if (target == 0 || GET_MODE (target) != TYPE_MODE (inner_type))
8032 = assign_stack_temp_for_type
8033 (TYPE_MODE (inner_type),
8034 GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (inner_type)), 0, inner_type);
8036 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
8040 /* At this point, OP0 is in the correct mode. If the output type is such
8041 that the operand is known to be aligned, indicate that it is.
8042 Otherwise, we need only be concerned about alignment for non-BLKmode
8046 op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
8048 if (TYPE_ALIGN_OK (type))
8049 set_mem_align (op0, MAX (MEM_ALIGN (op0), TYPE_ALIGN (type)));
8050 else if (TYPE_MODE (type) != BLKmode && STRICT_ALIGNMENT
8051 && MEM_ALIGN (op0) < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (TYPE_MODE (type)))
8053 tree inner_type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8054 HOST_WIDE_INT temp_size
8055 = MAX (int_size_in_bytes (inner_type),
8056 (HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)));
8057 rtx new = assign_stack_temp_for_type (TYPE_MODE (type),
8058 temp_size, 0, type);
8059 rtx new_with_op0_mode = adjust_address (new, GET_MODE (op0), 0);
8061 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp));
8063 if (GET_MODE (op0) == BLKmode)
8064 emit_block_move (new_with_op0_mode, op0,
8065 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type))),
8066 (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8067 ? BLOCK_OP_CALL_PARM : BLOCK_OP_NORMAL));
8069 emit_move_insn (new_with_op0_mode, op0);
8074 op0 = adjust_address (op0, TYPE_MODE (type), 0);
8079 case POINTER_PLUS_EXPR:
8080 /* Even though the sizetype mode and the pointer's mode can be different
8081 expand is able to handle this correctly and get the correct result out
8082 of the PLUS_EXPR code. */
8085 /* Check if this is a case for multiplication and addition. */
8086 if (TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8087 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == MULT_EXPR)
8089 tree subsubexp0, subsubexp1;
8090 enum tree_code code0, code1;
8092 subexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8093 subsubexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0);
8094 subsubexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 1);
8095 code0 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp0);
8096 code1 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp1);
8097 if (code0 == NOP_EXPR && code1 == NOP_EXPR
8098 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8099 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (subsubexp0)))
8100 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8101 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0))))
8102 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8103 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0)))))
8105 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0));
8106 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8107 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8108 this_optab = zextend_p ? umadd_widen_optab : smadd_widen_optab;
8109 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode)
8110 && (optab_handler (this_optab, mode)->insn_code
8111 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
8113 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0),
8114 TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0),
8115 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8116 op2 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget,
8117 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8118 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
8121 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8126 /* If we are adding a constant, a VAR_DECL that is sp, fp, or ap, and
8127 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
8128 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
8129 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
8130 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
8132 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
8133 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
8134 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
8135 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
8137 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
8138 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8139 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == VAR_DECL
8140 && (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
8141 || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
8142 || DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx))
8144 tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8146 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
8147 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t;
8150 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
8151 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
8152 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
8153 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
8154 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
8157 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
8158 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8159 || (mode == ptr_mode && (unsignedp || ! flag_trapv)))
8161 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8163 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
8164 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8165 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8169 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8171 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8172 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8173 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8174 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8176 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)),
8178 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
8179 op1 = plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (constant_part));
8180 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8181 op1 = force_operand (op1, target);
8182 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op1);
8185 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8186 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8187 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
8191 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8192 (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8193 ? EXPAND_INITIALIZER : EXPAND_SUM));
8194 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0))
8196 op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), NULL_RTX,
8197 VOIDmode, modifier);
8198 /* Return a PLUS if modifier says it's OK. */
8199 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM
8200 || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8201 return simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
8204 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
8205 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
8206 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
8207 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
8209 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
8211 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8212 op0 = plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (constant_part));
8213 if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8214 op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
8215 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (op0);
8219 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8220 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8221 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8223 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8224 || mode != ptr_mode)
8226 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8227 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8228 if (op0 == const0_rtx)
8230 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
8235 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8236 subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8237 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1));
8240 /* Check if this is a case for multiplication and subtraction. */
8241 if (TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8242 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == MULT_EXPR)
8244 tree subsubexp0, subsubexp1;
8245 enum tree_code code0, code1;
8247 subexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8248 subsubexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0);
8249 subsubexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 1);
8250 code0 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp0);
8251 code1 = TREE_CODE (subsubexp1);
8252 if (code0 == NOP_EXPR && code1 == NOP_EXPR
8253 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8254 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (subsubexp0)))
8255 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8256 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0))))
8257 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0)))
8258 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0)))))
8260 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0));
8261 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8262 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8263 this_optab = zextend_p ? umsub_widen_optab : smsub_widen_optab;
8264 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode)
8265 && (optab_handler (this_optab, mode)->insn_code
8266 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
8268 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp0, 0),
8269 TREE_OPERAND (subsubexp1, 0),
8270 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8271 op2 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8272 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8273 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
8276 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8281 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
8282 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
8284 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
8285 for the sake of an initializer. */
8286 if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8287 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8288 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
8290 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8291 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8293 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
8294 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
8295 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8296 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1)));
8298 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MINUS (mode, op0, op1));
8301 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
8302 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
8303 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
8305 if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
8306 || mode != ptr_mode)
8309 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8310 subtarget, &op0, &op1, modifier);
8312 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
8313 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
8315 op1 = negate_rtx (mode, op1);
8316 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, op1));
8322 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
8323 Thus the following special case checks need only
8324 check the second operand. */
8325 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
8327 tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8328 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8329 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1;
8332 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
8333 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
8335 if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == ptr_mode
8336 && host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0))
8338 tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8340 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
8344 op0 = force_operand (op0, NULL_RTX);
8346 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0);
8348 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (gen_rtx_MULT (mode, op0,
8349 gen_int_mode (tree_low_cst (exp1, 0),
8350 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1)))));
8353 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8356 /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
8357 from a narrower type. If this machine supports multiplying
8358 in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
8359 do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion. */
8361 subexp0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8362 subexp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8363 /* First, check if we have a multiplication of one signed and one
8364 unsigned operand. */
8365 if (TREE_CODE (subexp0) == NOP_EXPR
8366 && TREE_CODE (subexp1) == NOP_EXPR
8367 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8368 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8369 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
8370 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8371 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0))))
8372 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)))
8373 != TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0)))))
8375 enum machine_mode innermode
8376 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0)));
8377 this_optab = usmul_widen_optab;
8378 if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode))
8380 if (optab_handler (this_optab, mode)->insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
8382 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0))))
8383 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0),
8384 TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0),
8385 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
8387 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (subexp0, 0),
8388 TREE_OPERAND (subexp1, 0),
8389 NULL_RTX, &op1, &op0, 0);
8395 /* Check for a multiplication with matching signedness. */
8396 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
8397 && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
8398 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8399 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
8400 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
8401 && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8402 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
8403 /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do. */
8404 && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
8405 > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8406 || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0))
8408 (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
8409 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE
8410 (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8411 == TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE
8413 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))
8414 /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
8415 be zero-extended or both be sign-extended. */
8416 && (TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8417 (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
8418 == TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE
8420 (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))))))
8422 tree op0type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0));
8423 enum machine_mode innermode = TYPE_MODE (op0type);
8424 bool zextend_p = TYPE_UNSIGNED (op0type);
8425 optab other_optab = zextend_p ? smul_widen_optab : umul_widen_optab;
8426 this_optab = zextend_p ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab;
8428 if (mode == GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (innermode))
8430 if (optab_handler (this_optab, mode)->insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
8432 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8433 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8434 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8435 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8437 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
8438 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
8439 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8442 else if (optab_handler (other_optab, mode)->insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing
8443 && innermode == word_mode)
8446 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0));
8447 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
8448 op1 = convert_modes (innermode, mode,
8449 expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
8452 op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0));
8453 temp = expand_binop (mode, other_optab, op0, op1, target,
8454 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8455 hipart = gen_highpart (innermode, temp);
8456 htem = expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode, hipart,
8460 emit_move_insn (hipart, htem);
8461 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8465 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8466 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8467 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp));
8469 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR:
8470 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
8472 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR:
8473 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR:
8474 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8476 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
8477 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
8478 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
8479 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8480 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8481 return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8486 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR:
8487 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR:
8489 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR:
8490 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8492 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8493 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
8494 return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
8496 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
8497 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8498 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8499 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8500 expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp);
8504 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8505 if (target == 0 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8506 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8507 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
8508 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
8509 if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
8510 op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
8512 expand_float (target, op0,
8513 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
8517 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8518 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8519 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8521 temp = expand_unop (mode,
8522 optab_for_tree_code (NEGATE_EXPR, type),
8525 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
8528 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8529 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8530 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8533 /* ABS_EXPR is not valid for complex arguments. */
8534 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
8535 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT);
8537 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
8538 risk generating incorrect code below. */
8539 if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type))
8542 return expand_abs (mode, op0, target, unsignedp,
8543 safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1));
8547 target = original_target;
8549 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8550 || (MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
8551 || GET_MODE (target) != mode
8553 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
8554 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8555 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
8556 target, &op0, &op1, 0);
8558 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
8559 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
8561 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
8562 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
8567 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
8570 if (! REG_P (target))
8571 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
8573 /* If op1 was placed in target, swap op0 and op1. */
8574 if (target != op0 && target == op1)
8581 /* We generate better code and avoid problems with op1 mentioning
8582 target by forcing op1 into a pseudo if it isn't a constant. */
8583 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
8584 op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
8587 enum rtx_code comparison_code;
8590 if (code == MAX_EXPR)
8591 comparison_code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
8593 comparison_code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
8595 /* Canonicalize to comparisons against 0. */
8596 if (op1 == const1_rtx)
8598 /* Converting (a >= 1 ? a : 1) into (a > 0 ? a : 1)
8599 or (a != 0 ? a : 1) for unsigned.
8600 For MIN we are safe converting (a <= 1 ? a : 1)
8601 into (a <= 0 ? a : 1) */
8602 cmpop1 = const0_rtx;
8603 if (code == MAX_EXPR)
8604 comparison_code = unsignedp ? NE : GT;
8606 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && !unsignedp)
8608 /* Converting (a >= -1 ? a : -1) into (a >= 0 ? a : -1)
8609 and (a <= -1 ? a : -1) into (a < 0 ? a : -1) */
8610 cmpop1 = const0_rtx;
8611 if (code == MIN_EXPR)
8612 comparison_code = LT;
8614 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8615 /* Use a conditional move if possible. */
8616 if (can_conditionally_move_p (mode))
8620 /* ??? Same problem as in expmed.c: emit_conditional_move
8621 forces a stack adjustment via compare_from_rtx, and we
8622 lose the stack adjustment if the sequence we are about
8623 to create is discarded. */
8624 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8628 /* Try to emit the conditional move. */
8629 insn = emit_conditional_move (target, comparison_code,
8634 /* If we could do the conditional move, emit the sequence,
8638 rtx seq = get_insns ();
8644 /* Otherwise discard the sequence and fall back to code with
8650 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
8652 temp = gen_label_rtx ();
8653 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target, cmpop1, comparison_code,
8654 unsignedp, mode, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, temp);
8656 emit_move_insn (target, op1);
8661 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8662 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8663 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8665 temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1);
8669 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
8670 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
8671 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
8672 but that is probably not worth while. */
8674 /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding. TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two
8675 boolean values when we want in all cases to compute both of them. In
8676 general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by computing both operands
8677 as actual zero-or-1 values and then bitwise anding. In cases where
8678 there cannot be any side effects, better code would be made by
8679 treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR; but the question is
8680 how to recognize those cases. */
8682 case TRUTH_AND_EXPR:
8683 code = BIT_AND_EXPR;
8688 code = BIT_IOR_EXPR;
8692 case TRUTH_XOR_EXPR:
8693 code = BIT_XOR_EXPR;
8701 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 1))
8703 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8705 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget,
8706 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8707 return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target,
8710 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
8711 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
8718 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
8726 temp = do_store_flag (exp,
8727 modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM ? target : NULL_RTX,
8728 tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0);
8732 /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
8733 if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
8735 && REG_P (original_target)
8736 && (GET_MODE (original_target)
8737 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
8739 temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target,
8740 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8742 /* If temp is constant, we can just compute the result. */
8743 if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT)
8745 if (INTVAL (temp) != 0)
8746 emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
8748 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
8753 if (temp != original_target)
8755 enum machine_mode mode1 = GET_MODE (temp);
8756 if (mode1 == VOIDmode)
8757 mode1 = tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode;
8759 temp = copy_to_mode_reg (mode1, temp);
8762 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8763 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, NULL_RTX,
8764 GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, op1);
8765 emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx);
8770 /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional store
8771 into a temporary variable. Drop through and handle this
8776 || modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8777 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp, 1)
8778 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
8779 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
8780 || (!optimize && REG_P (target)
8781 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
8782 target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
8785 emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
8787 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8788 jumpifnot (exp, op1);
8791 emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
8794 return ignore ? const0_rtx : target;
8796 case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
8797 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
8799 op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target,
8800 VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
8801 /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
8802 only with operands that are always zero or one. */
8803 temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx,
8804 target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
8808 case STATEMENT_LIST:
8810 tree_stmt_iterator iter;
8812 gcc_assert (ignore);
8814 for (iter = tsi_start (exp); !tsi_end_p (iter); tsi_next (&iter))
8815 expand_expr (tsi_stmt (iter), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
8820 /* A COND_EXPR with its type being VOID_TYPE represents a
8821 conditional jump and is handled in
8822 expand_gimple_cond_expr. */
8823 gcc_assert (!VOID_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
8825 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
8826 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
8827 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
8828 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
8830 gcc_assert (!TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type)
8832 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != void_type_node
8833 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != void_type_node);
8835 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
8836 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
8837 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
8840 if (modifier != EXPAND_STACK_PARM
8842 && safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)
8843 && GET_MODE (original_target) == mode
8844 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
8845 && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode)
8846 || REG_P (original_target))
8848 && !MEM_P (original_target))
8849 temp = original_target;
8851 temp = assign_temp (type, 0, 0, 1);
8853 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8855 op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
8856 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
8857 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
8858 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp,
8859 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
8862 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1));
8865 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp,
8866 modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM,
8874 target = expand_vec_cond_expr (exp, target);
8879 tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8880 tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8881 gcc_assert (ignore);
8882 expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, false);
8886 case GIMPLE_MODIFY_STMT:
8888 tree lhs = GIMPLE_STMT_OPERAND (exp, 0);
8889 tree rhs = GIMPLE_STMT_OPERAND (exp, 1);
8891 gcc_assert (ignore);
8893 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
8894 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
8895 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
8896 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
8898 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
8899 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
8901 if (TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF
8902 && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
8903 || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
8904 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs
8905 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
8906 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1)))
8907 && integer_onep (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1))))
8909 rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
8910 int value = TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR;
8911 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1),
8914 expand_assignment (lhs, build_int_cst (TREE_TYPE (rhs), value),
8915 MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp));
8916 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8921 expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, MOVE_NONTEMPORAL (exp));
8926 if (!TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
8927 expand_null_return ();
8929 expand_return (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8933 return expand_expr_addr_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
8936 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8937 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8938 op1 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
8941 target = gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
8943 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8944 write_complex_part (target, op0, false);
8945 write_complex_part (target, op1, true);
8950 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8951 return read_complex_part (op0, false);
8954 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
8955 return read_complex_part (op0, true);
8958 expand_resx_expr (exp);
8961 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR:
8963 case EH_FILTER_EXPR:
8964 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR:
8965 /* Lowered by tree-eh.c. */
8968 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
8969 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR:
8971 case CASE_LABEL_EXPR:
8977 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR:
8978 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR:
8979 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR:
8980 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR:
8983 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
8984 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
8985 /* Lowered by gimplify.c. */
8988 case CHANGE_DYNAMIC_TYPE_EXPR:
8989 /* This is ignored at the RTL level. The tree level set
8990 DECL_POINTER_ALIAS_SET of any variable to be 0, which is
8991 overkill for the RTL layer but is all that we can
8996 return get_exception_pointer (cfun);
8999 return get_exception_filter (cfun);
9002 /* Function descriptors are not valid except for as
9003 initialization constants, and should not be expanded. */
9011 expand_label (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9015 expand_asm_expr (exp);
9018 case WITH_SIZE_EXPR:
9019 /* WITH_SIZE_EXPR expands to its first argument. The caller should
9020 have pulled out the size to use in whatever context it needed. */
9021 return expand_expr_real (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, tmode,
9024 case REALIGN_LOAD_EXPR:
9026 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9027 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9028 tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
9031 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9032 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9033 op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2);
9034 temp = expand_ternary_op (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, op2,
9042 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9043 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9044 tree oprnd2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
9047 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9048 op2 = expand_normal (oprnd2);
9049 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, op1, op2,
9054 case WIDEN_SUM_EXPR:
9056 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9057 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9059 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9060 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, op1,
9065 case REDUC_MAX_EXPR:
9066 case REDUC_MIN_EXPR:
9067 case REDUC_PLUS_EXPR:
9069 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9070 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9071 temp = expand_unop (mode, this_optab, op0, target, unsignedp);
9076 case VEC_EXTRACT_EVEN_EXPR:
9077 case VEC_EXTRACT_ODD_EXPR:
9079 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9080 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9081 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9082 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
9088 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_HIGH_EXPR:
9089 case VEC_INTERLEAVE_LOW_EXPR:
9091 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9092 NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9093 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9094 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
9100 case VEC_LSHIFT_EXPR:
9101 case VEC_RSHIFT_EXPR:
9103 target = expand_vec_shift_expr (exp, target);
9107 case VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR:
9108 case VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR:
9110 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9111 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9112 temp = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
9118 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_HI_EXPR:
9119 case VEC_UNPACK_FLOAT_LO_EXPR:
9121 op0 = expand_normal (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
9122 /* The signedness is determined from input operand. */
9123 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code,
9124 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
9125 temp = expand_widen_pattern_expr
9126 (exp, op0, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
9127 target, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
9133 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI_EXPR:
9134 case VEC_WIDEN_MULT_LO_EXPR:
9136 tree oprnd0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9137 tree oprnd1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9139 expand_operands (oprnd0, oprnd1, NULL_RTX, &op0, &op1, 0);
9140 target = expand_widen_pattern_expr (exp, op0, op1, NULL_RTX,
9142 gcc_assert (target);
9146 case VEC_PACK_TRUNC_EXPR:
9147 case VEC_PACK_SAT_EXPR:
9148 case VEC_PACK_FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
9150 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
9155 return lang_hooks.expand_expr (exp, original_target, tmode,
9159 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator. */
9161 expand_operands (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
9162 subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
9164 this_optab = optab_for_tree_code (code, type);
9166 if (modifier == EXPAND_STACK_PARM)
9168 temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target,
9169 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9171 return REDUCE_BIT_FIELD (temp);
9173 #undef REDUCE_BIT_FIELD
9175 /* Subroutine of above: reduce EXP to the precision of TYPE (in the
9176 signedness of TYPE), possibly returning the result in TARGET. */
9178 reduce_to_bit_field_precision (rtx exp, rtx target, tree type)
9180 HOST_WIDE_INT prec = TYPE_PRECISION (type);
9181 if (target && GET_MODE (target) != GET_MODE (exp))
9183 /* For constant values, reduce using build_int_cst_type. */
9184 if (GET_CODE (exp) == CONST_INT)
9186 HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (exp);
9187 tree t = build_int_cst_type (type, value);
9188 return expand_expr (t, target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9190 else if (TYPE_UNSIGNED (type))
9193 if (prec < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
9194 mask = immed_double_const (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << prec) - 1, 0,
9197 mask = immed_double_const ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) -1,
9198 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
9199 << (prec - HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)) - 1,
9201 return expand_and (GET_MODE (exp), exp, mask, target);
9205 tree count = build_int_cst (NULL_TREE,
9206 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (exp)) - prec);
9207 exp = expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0);
9208 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (exp), exp, count, target, 0);
9212 /* Subroutine of above: returns 1 if OFFSET corresponds to an offset that
9213 when applied to the address of EXP produces an address known to be
9214 aligned more than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9217 is_aligning_offset (tree offset, tree exp)
9219 /* Strip off any conversions. */
9220 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9221 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9222 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9223 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9225 /* We must now have a BIT_AND_EXPR with a constant that is one less than
9226 power of 2 and which is larger than BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT. */
9227 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != BIT_AND_EXPR
9228 || !host_integerp (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1)
9229 || compare_tree_int (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1),
9230 BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT) <= 0
9231 || !exact_log2 (tree_low_cst (TREE_OPERAND (offset, 1), 1) + 1) < 0)
9234 /* Look at the first operand of BIT_AND_EXPR and strip any conversion.
9235 It must be NEGATE_EXPR. Then strip any more conversions. */
9236 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9237 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9238 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9239 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9240 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9242 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != NEGATE_EXPR)
9245 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9246 while (TREE_CODE (offset) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR
9247 || TREE_CODE (offset) == NOP_EXPR
9248 || TREE_CODE (offset) == CONVERT_EXPR)
9249 offset = TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0);
9251 /* This must now be the address of EXP. */
9252 return TREE_CODE (offset) == ADDR_EXPR && TREE_OPERAND (offset, 0) == exp;
9255 /* Return the tree node if an ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
9256 if it doesn't. If we return nonzero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
9257 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
9258 offset will be `sizetype'. */
9261 string_constant (tree arg, tree *ptr_offset)
9263 tree array, offset, lower_bound;
9266 if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR)
9268 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST)
9270 *ptr_offset = size_zero_node;
9271 return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9273 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == VAR_DECL)
9275 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9276 offset = size_zero_node;
9278 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == ARRAY_REF)
9280 array = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 0);
9281 offset = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0), 1);
9282 if (TREE_CODE (array) != STRING_CST
9283 && TREE_CODE (array) != VAR_DECL)
9286 /* Check if the array has a nonzero lower bound. */
9287 lower_bound = array_ref_low_bound (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0));
9288 if (!integer_zerop (lower_bound))
9290 /* If the offset and base aren't both constants, return 0. */
9291 if (TREE_CODE (lower_bound) != INTEGER_CST)
9293 if (TREE_CODE (offset) != INTEGER_CST)
9295 /* Adjust offset by the lower bound. */
9296 offset = size_diffop (fold_convert (sizetype, offset),
9297 fold_convert (sizetype, lower_bound));
9303 else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR || TREE_CODE (arg) == POINTER_PLUS_EXPR)
9305 tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
9306 tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1);
9311 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR
9312 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST
9313 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == VAR_DECL))
9315 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
9318 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR
9319 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST
9320 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == VAR_DECL))
9322 array = TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
9331 if (TREE_CODE (array) == STRING_CST)
9333 *ptr_offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset);
9336 else if (TREE_CODE (array) == VAR_DECL)
9340 /* Variables initialized to string literals can be handled too. */
9341 if (DECL_INITIAL (array) == NULL_TREE
9342 || TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array)) != STRING_CST)
9345 /* If they are read-only, non-volatile and bind locally. */
9346 if (! TREE_READONLY (array)
9347 || TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array)
9348 || ! targetm.binds_local_p (array))
9351 /* Avoid const char foo[4] = "abcde"; */
9352 if (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array) == NULL_TREE
9353 || TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array)) != INTEGER_CST
9354 || (length = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (DECL_INITIAL (array))) <= 0
9355 || compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) < 0)
9358 /* If variable is bigger than the string literal, OFFSET must be constant
9359 and inside of the bounds of the string literal. */
9360 offset = fold_convert (sizetype, offset);
9361 if (compare_tree_int (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (array), length) > 0
9362 && (! host_integerp (offset, 1)
9363 || compare_tree_int (offset, length) >= 0))
9366 *ptr_offset = offset;
9367 return DECL_INITIAL (array);
9373 /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
9374 and return an rtx for the result. EXP is either a comparison
9375 or a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR whose operand is a comparison.
9377 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
9379 If ONLY_CHEAP is nonzero, only do this if it is likely to be very
9382 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
9383 available on this machine.
9385 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
9386 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
9387 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
9388 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
9389 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
9390 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
9391 set/jump/set sequence. */
9394 do_store_flag (tree exp, rtx target, enum machine_mode mode, int only_cheap)
9397 tree arg0, arg1, type;
9399 enum machine_mode operand_mode;
9403 enum insn_code icode;
9404 rtx subtarget = target;
9407 /* If this is a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR, set a flag indicating we must invert the
9408 result at the end. We can't simply invert the test since it would
9409 have already been inverted if it were valid. This case occurs for
9410 some floating-point comparisons. */
9412 if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TRUTH_NOT_EXPR)
9413 invert = 1, exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9415 arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
9416 arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
9418 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
9419 if (arg0 == error_mark_node || arg1 == error_mark_node)
9422 type = TREE_TYPE (arg0);
9423 operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
9424 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (type);
9426 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
9427 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
9428 if (operand_mode == BLKmode)
9431 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
9432 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
9433 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9434 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
9435 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE
9436 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
9438 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE
9439 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
9440 == FUNCTION_TYPE))))
9447 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
9448 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
9449 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
9450 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
9451 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
9452 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
9454 switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
9463 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9464 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9466 code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
9469 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9470 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = LT;
9472 code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
9475 if (! unsignedp && integer_all_onesp (arg1))
9476 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = GE;
9478 code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9481 if (integer_onep (arg1))
9482 arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
9484 code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
9487 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
9516 /* Put a constant second. */
9517 if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST)
9519 tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem;
9520 code = swap_condition (code);
9523 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
9524 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
9525 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
9526 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
9527 than an scc insn even if we have it.
9529 The code to make this transformation was moved into fold_single_bit_test,
9530 so we just call into the folder and expand its result. */
9532 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
9533 && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1)
9534 && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1)))
9536 tree type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_mode (mode, unsignedp);
9537 return expand_expr (fold_single_bit_test (code == NE ? NE_EXPR : EQ_EXPR,
9539 target, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
9542 /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this. Return if not. */
9543 if (! can_compare_p (code, operand_mode, ccp_store_flag))
9546 icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code];
9548 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
9550 enum machine_mode wmode;
9552 for (wmode = operand_mode;
9553 icode == CODE_FOR_nothing && wmode != VOIDmode;
9554 wmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wmode))
9555 icode = optab_handler (cstore_optab, wmode)->insn_code;
9558 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
9559 || (only_cheap && insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode != mode))
9561 /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
9562 can be handled without an scc insn. */
9563 if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1))
9564 || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1)))
9566 else if (! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ)
9567 && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE
9568 && ((optab_handler (abs_optab, operand_mode)->insn_code
9569 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
9570 || (optab_handler (ffs_optab, operand_mode)->insn_code
9571 != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
9577 if (! get_subtarget (target)
9578 || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode)
9581 expand_operands (arg0, arg1, subtarget, &op0, &op1, 0);
9584 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
9586 result = emit_store_flag (target, code, op0, op1,
9587 operand_mode, unsignedp, 1);
9592 result = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, result, const1_rtx,
9593 result, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
9597 /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code. */
9599 || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1))
9600 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
9602 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx);
9603 label = gen_label_rtx ();
9604 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, operand_mode, NULL_RTX,
9607 emit_move_insn (target, invert ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx);
9614 /* Stubs in case we haven't got a casesi insn. */
9616 # define HAVE_casesi 0
9617 # define gen_casesi(a, b, c, d, e) (0)
9618 # define CODE_FOR_casesi CODE_FOR_nothing
9621 /* If the machine does not have a case insn that compares the bounds,
9622 this means extra overhead for dispatch tables, which raises the
9623 threshold for using them. */
9624 #ifndef CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
9625 #define CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD (HAVE_casesi ? 4 : 5)
9626 #endif /* CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD */
9629 case_values_threshold (void)
9631 return CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD;
9634 /* Attempt to generate a casesi instruction. Returns 1 if successful,
9635 0 otherwise (i.e. if there is no casesi instruction). */
9637 try_casesi (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range,
9638 rtx table_label ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx default_label)
9640 enum machine_mode index_mode = SImode;
9641 int index_bits = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode);
9642 rtx op1, op2, index;
9643 enum machine_mode op_mode;
9648 /* Convert the index to SImode. */
9649 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (index_type)) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (index_mode))
9651 enum machine_mode omode = TYPE_MODE (index_type);
9652 rtx rangertx = expand_normal (range);
9654 /* We must handle the endpoints in the original mode. */
9655 index_expr = build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
9656 index_expr, minval);
9657 minval = integer_zero_node;
9658 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9659 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rangertx, index, LTU, NULL_RTX,
9660 omode, 1, default_label);
9661 /* Now we can safely truncate. */
9662 index = convert_to_mode (index_mode, index, 0);
9666 if (TYPE_MODE (index_type) != index_mode)
9668 index_type = lang_hooks.types.type_for_size (index_bits, 0);
9669 index_expr = fold_convert (index_type, index_expr);
9672 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9675 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9677 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].mode;
9678 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[0].predicate)
9680 index = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, index);
9682 op1 = expand_normal (minval);
9684 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].mode;
9685 op1 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (minval)),
9686 op1, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (minval)));
9687 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[1].predicate)
9689 op1 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op1);
9691 op2 = expand_normal (range);
9693 op_mode = insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].mode;
9694 op2 = convert_modes (op_mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
9695 op2, TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range)));
9696 if (! (*insn_data[(int) CODE_FOR_casesi].operand[2].predicate)
9698 op2 = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, op2);
9700 emit_jump_insn (gen_casesi (index, op1, op2,
9701 table_label, default_label));
9705 /* Attempt to generate a tablejump instruction; same concept. */
9706 #ifndef HAVE_tablejump
9707 #define HAVE_tablejump 0
9708 #define gen_tablejump(x, y) (0)
9711 /* Subroutine of the next function.
9713 INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
9714 in the table already subtracted.
9715 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
9716 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
9717 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
9719 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
9720 index value is out of range. */
9723 do_tablejump (rtx index, enum machine_mode mode, rtx range, rtx table_label,
9728 if (INTVAL (range) > cfun->max_jumptable_ents)
9729 cfun->max_jumptable_ents = INTVAL (range);
9731 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
9732 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
9733 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
9734 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
9735 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
9736 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
9737 the maximum value of the range. */
9739 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index, range, GTU, NULL_RTX, mode, 1,
9742 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
9743 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
9745 index = convert_to_mode (Pmode, index, 1);
9747 /* Don't let a MEM slip through, because then INDEX that comes
9748 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
9749 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
9750 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
9751 if (flag_pic && !REG_P (index))
9752 index = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, index);
9755 /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
9756 it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
9757 about addresses that contain label-refs,
9758 which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself. */
9759 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
9760 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
9761 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
9762 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
9763 index = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
9764 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode, index,
9765 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))),
9766 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode, table_label));
9767 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
9769 index = PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index);
9772 index = memory_address_noforce (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
9773 temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE);
9774 vector = gen_const_mem (CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
9775 convert_move (temp, vector, 0);
9777 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label));
9779 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
9780 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
9781 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE && ! flag_pic)
9786 try_tablejump (tree index_type, tree index_expr, tree minval, tree range,
9787 rtx table_label, rtx default_label)
9791 if (! HAVE_tablejump)
9794 index_expr = fold_build2 (MINUS_EXPR, index_type,
9795 fold_convert (index_type, index_expr),
9796 fold_convert (index_type, minval));
9797 index = expand_normal (index_expr);
9798 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9800 do_tablejump (index, TYPE_MODE (index_type),
9801 convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (index_type),
9802 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (range)),
9803 expand_normal (range),
9804 TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (range))),
9805 table_label, default_label);
9809 /* Nonzero if the mode is a valid vector mode for this architecture.
9810 This returns nonzero even if there is no hardware support for the
9811 vector mode, but we can emulate with narrower modes. */
9814 vector_mode_valid_p (enum machine_mode mode)
9816 enum mode_class class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
9817 enum machine_mode innermode;
9819 /* Doh! What's going on? */
9820 if (class != MODE_VECTOR_INT
9821 && class != MODE_VECTOR_FLOAT)
9824 /* Hardware support. Woo hoo! */
9825 if (targetm.vector_mode_supported_p (mode))
9828 innermode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
9830 /* We should probably return 1 if requesting V4DI and we have no DI,
9831 but we have V2DI, but this is probably very unlikely. */
9833 /* If we have support for the inner mode, we can safely emulate it.
9834 We may not have V2DI, but me can emulate with a pair of DIs. */
9835 return targetm.scalar_mode_supported_p (innermode);
9838 /* Return a CONST_VECTOR rtx for a VECTOR_CST tree. */
9840 const_vector_from_tree (tree exp)
9845 enum machine_mode inner, mode;
9847 mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
9849 if (initializer_zerop (exp))
9850 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
9852 units = GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode);
9853 inner = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
9855 v = rtvec_alloc (units);
9857 link = TREE_VECTOR_CST_ELTS (exp);
9858 for (i = 0; link; link = TREE_CHAIN (link), ++i)
9860 elt = TREE_VALUE (link);
9862 if (TREE_CODE (elt) == REAL_CST)
9863 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (TREE_REAL_CST (elt),
9866 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (elt),
9867 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (elt),
9871 /* Initialize remaining elements to 0. */
9872 for (; i < units; ++i)
9873 RTVEC_ELT (v, i) = CONST0_RTX (inner);
9875 return gen_rtx_CONST_VECTOR (mode, v);
9877 #include "gt-expr.h"